mirror of
https://github.com/redstrate/Novus.git
synced 2025-04-22 03:57:45 +00:00
4646 lines
306 KiB
C++
4646 lines
306 KiB
C++
// dear imgui, v1.89.9
|
|
// (headers)
|
|
|
|
// Help:
|
|
// - Read FAQ at http://dearimgui.com/faq
|
|
// - Newcomers, read 'Programmer guide' in imgui.cpp for notes on how to setup Dear ImGui in your codebase.
|
|
// - Call and read ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() in imgui_demo.cpp. All applications in examples/ are doing that.
|
|
// Read imgui.cpp for details, links and comments.
|
|
|
|
// Resources:
|
|
// - FAQ http://dearimgui.com/faq
|
|
// - Homepage https://github.com/ocornut/imgui
|
|
// - Releases & changelog https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/releases
|
|
// - Gallery https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/6478 (please post your screenshots/video there!)
|
|
// - Wiki https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki (lots of good stuff there)
|
|
// - Getting Started https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Getting-Started
|
|
// - Glossary https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Glossary
|
|
// - Issues & support https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues
|
|
// - Tests & Automation https://github.com/ocornut/imgui_test_engine
|
|
|
|
// Getting Started?
|
|
// - Read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Getting-Started
|
|
// - For first-time users having issues compiling/linking/running/loading fonts:
|
|
// please post in https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/discussions if you cannot find a solution in resources above.
|
|
|
|
// Library Version
|
|
// (Integer encoded as XYYZZ for use in #if preprocessor conditionals, e.g. '#if IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 12345')
|
|
#define IMGUI_VERSION "1.89.9"
|
|
#define IMGUI_VERSION_NUM 18990
|
|
#define IMGUI_HAS_TABLE
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
Index of this file:
|
|
// [SECTION] Header mess
|
|
// [SECTION] Forward declarations and basic types
|
|
// [SECTION] Dear ImGui end-user API functions
|
|
// [SECTION] Flags & Enumerations
|
|
// [SECTION] Helpers: Memory allocations macros, ImVector<>
|
|
// [SECTION] ImGuiStyle
|
|
// [SECTION] ImGuiIO
|
|
// [SECTION] Misc data structures (ImGuiInputTextCallbackData, ImGuiSizeCallbackData, ImGuiPayload, ImGuiTableSortSpecs, ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs)
|
|
// [SECTION] Helpers (ImGuiOnceUponAFrame, ImGuiTextFilter, ImGuiTextBuffer, ImGuiStorage, ImGuiListClipper, Math Operators, ImColor)
|
|
// [SECTION] Drawing API (ImDrawCallback, ImDrawCmd, ImDrawIdx, ImDrawVert, ImDrawChannel, ImDrawListSplitter, ImDrawFlags, ImDrawListFlags, ImDrawList,
|
|
ImDrawData)
|
|
// [SECTION] Font API (ImFontConfig, ImFontGlyph, ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder, ImFontAtlasFlags, ImFontAtlas, ImFont)
|
|
// [SECTION] Viewports (ImGuiViewportFlags, ImGuiViewport)
|
|
// [SECTION] Platform Dependent Interfaces (ImGuiPlatformImeData)
|
|
// [SECTION] Obsolete functions and types
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
#pragma once
|
|
|
|
// Configuration file with compile-time options
|
|
// (edit imconfig.h or '#define IMGUI_USER_CONFIG "myfilename.h" from your build system')
|
|
#ifdef IMGUI_USER_CONFIG
|
|
#include IMGUI_USER_CONFIG
|
|
#endif
|
|
#include "imconfig.h"
|
|
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Header mess
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Includes
|
|
#include <float.h> // FLT_MIN, FLT_MAX
|
|
#include <stdarg.h> // va_list, va_start, va_end
|
|
#include <stddef.h> // ptrdiff_t, NULL
|
|
#include <string.h> // memset, memmove, memcpy, strlen, strchr, strcpy, strcmp
|
|
|
|
// Define attributes of all API symbols declarations (e.g. for DLL under Windows)
|
|
// IMGUI_API is used for core imgui functions, IMGUI_IMPL_API is used for the default backends files (imgui_impl_xxx.h)
|
|
// Using dear imgui via a shared library is not recommended, because we don't guarantee backward nor forward ABI compatibility (also function call overhead, as
|
|
// dear imgui is a call-heavy API)
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_API
|
|
#define IMGUI_API
|
|
#endif
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_IMPL_API
|
|
#define IMGUI_IMPL_API IMGUI_API
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Helper Macros
|
|
#ifndef IM_ASSERT
|
|
#include <assert.h>
|
|
#define IM_ASSERT(_EXPR) assert(_EXPR) // You can override the default assert handler by editing imconfig.h
|
|
#endif
|
|
#define IM_ARRAYSIZE(_ARR) ((int)(sizeof(_ARR) / sizeof(*(_ARR)))) // Size of a static C-style array. Don't use on pointers!
|
|
#define IM_UNUSED(_VAR) ((void)(_VAR)) // Used to silence "unused variable warnings". Often useful as asserts may be stripped out from final builds.
|
|
#define IM_OFFSETOF(_TYPE, _MEMBER) offsetof(_TYPE, _MEMBER) // Offset of _MEMBER within _TYPE. Standardized as offsetof() in C++11
|
|
#define IMGUI_CHECKVERSION() \
|
|
ImGui::DebugCheckVersionAndDataLayout(IMGUI_VERSION, \
|
|
sizeof(ImGuiIO), \
|
|
sizeof(ImGuiStyle), \
|
|
sizeof(ImVec2), \
|
|
sizeof(ImVec4), \
|
|
sizeof(ImDrawVert), \
|
|
sizeof(ImDrawIdx))
|
|
|
|
// Helper Macros - IM_FMTARGS, IM_FMTLIST: Apply printf-style warnings to our formatting functions.
|
|
#if !defined(IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF) && defined(__MINGW32__) && !defined(__clang__)
|
|
#define IM_FMTARGS(FMT) __attribute__((format(gnu_printf, FMT, FMT + 1)))
|
|
#define IM_FMTLIST(FMT) __attribute__((format(gnu_printf, FMT, 0)))
|
|
#elif !defined(IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF) && (defined(__clang__) || defined(__GNUC__))
|
|
#define IM_FMTARGS(FMT) __attribute__((format(printf, FMT, FMT + 1)))
|
|
#define IM_FMTLIST(FMT) __attribute__((format(printf, FMT, 0)))
|
|
#else
|
|
#define IM_FMTARGS(FMT)
|
|
#define IM_FMTLIST(FMT)
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Disable some of MSVC most aggressive Debug runtime checks in function header/footer (used in some simple/low-level functions)
|
|
#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(__clang__) && !defined(__INTEL_COMPILER) && !defined(IMGUI_DEBUG_PARANOID)
|
|
#define IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF __pragma(runtime_checks("", off)) __pragma(check_stack(off)) __pragma(strict_gs_check(push, off))
|
|
#define IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE __pragma(runtime_checks("", restore)) __pragma(check_stack()) __pragma(strict_gs_check(pop))
|
|
#else
|
|
#define IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF
|
|
#define IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Warnings
|
|
#ifdef _MSC_VER
|
|
#pragma warning(push)
|
|
#pragma warning(disable : 26495) // [Static Analyzer] Variable 'XXX' is uninitialized. Always initialize a member variable (type.6).
|
|
#endif
|
|
#if defined(__clang__)
|
|
#pragma clang diagnostic push
|
|
#if __has_warning("-Wunknown-warning-option")
|
|
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-warning-option" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx'
|
|
#endif
|
|
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-pragmas" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx'
|
|
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast"
|
|
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant"
|
|
#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wreserved-identifier" // warning: identifier '_Xxx' is reserved because it starts with '_' followed by a capital letter
|
|
#elif defined(__GNUC__)
|
|
#pragma GCC diagnostic push
|
|
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas" // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind
|
|
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess" // [__GNUC__ >= 8] warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial
|
|
// copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Forward declarations and basic types
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Forward declarations
|
|
struct ImDrawChannel; // Temporary storage to output draw commands out of order, used by ImDrawListSplitter and ImDrawList::ChannelsSplit()
|
|
struct ImDrawCmd; // A single draw command within a parent ImDrawList (generally maps to 1 GPU draw call, unless it is a callback)
|
|
struct ImDrawData; // All draw command lists required to render the frame + pos/size coordinates to use for the projection matrix.
|
|
struct ImDrawList; // A single draw command list (generally one per window, conceptually you may see this as a dynamic "mesh" builder)
|
|
struct ImDrawListSharedData; // Data shared among multiple draw lists (typically owned by parent ImGui context, but you may create one yourself)
|
|
struct ImDrawListSplitter; // Helper to split a draw list into different layers which can be drawn into out of order, then flattened back.
|
|
struct ImDrawVert; // A single vertex (pos + uv + col = 20 bytes by default. Override layout with IMGUI_OVERRIDE_DRAWVERT_STRUCT_LAYOUT)
|
|
struct ImFont; // Runtime data for a single font within a parent ImFontAtlas
|
|
struct ImFontAtlas; // Runtime data for multiple fonts, bake multiple fonts into a single texture, TTF/OTF font loader
|
|
struct ImFontBuilderIO; // Opaque interface to a font builder (stb_truetype or FreeType).
|
|
struct ImFontConfig; // Configuration data when adding a font or merging fonts
|
|
struct ImFontGlyph; // A single font glyph (code point + coordinates within in ImFontAtlas + offset)
|
|
struct ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder; // Helper to build glyph ranges from text/string data
|
|
struct ImColor; // Helper functions to create a color that can be converted to either u32 or float4 (*OBSOLETE* please avoid using)
|
|
struct ImGuiContext; // Dear ImGui context (opaque structure, unless including imgui_internal.h)
|
|
struct ImGuiIO; // Main configuration and I/O between your application and ImGui
|
|
struct ImGuiInputTextCallbackData; // Shared state of InputText() when using custom ImGuiInputTextCallback (rare/advanced use)
|
|
struct ImGuiKeyData; // Storage for ImGuiIO and IsKeyDown(), IsKeyPressed() etc functions.
|
|
struct ImGuiListClipper; // Helper to manually clip large list of items
|
|
struct ImGuiOnceUponAFrame; // Helper for running a block of code not more than once a frame
|
|
struct ImGuiPayload; // User data payload for drag and drop operations
|
|
struct ImGuiPlatformImeData; // Platform IME data for io.SetPlatformImeDataFn() function.
|
|
struct ImGuiSizeCallbackData; // Callback data when using SetNextWindowSizeConstraints() (rare/advanced use)
|
|
struct ImGuiStorage; // Helper for key->value storage
|
|
struct ImGuiStyle; // Runtime data for styling/colors
|
|
struct ImGuiTableSortSpecs; // Sorting specifications for a table (often handling sort specs for a single column, occasionally more)
|
|
struct ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs; // Sorting specification for one column of a table
|
|
struct ImGuiTextBuffer; // Helper to hold and append into a text buffer (~string builder)
|
|
struct ImGuiTextFilter; // Helper to parse and apply text filters (e.g. "aaaaa[,bbbbb][,ccccc]")
|
|
struct ImGuiViewport; // A Platform Window (always only one in 'master' branch), in the future may represent Platform Monitor
|
|
|
|
// Enumerations
|
|
// - We don't use strongly typed enums much because they add constraints (can't extend in private code, can't store typed in bit fields, extra casting on
|
|
// iteration)
|
|
// - Tip: Use your programming IDE navigation facilities on the names in the _central column_ below to find the actual flags/enum lists!
|
|
// In Visual Studio IDE: CTRL+comma ("Edit.GoToAll") can follow symbols in comments, whereas CTRL+F12 ("Edit.GoToImplementation") cannot.
|
|
// With Visual Assist installed: ALT+G ("VAssistX.GoToImplementation") can also follow symbols in comments.
|
|
enum ImGuiKey : int; // -> enum ImGuiKey // Enum: A key identifier (ImGuiKey_XXX or ImGuiMod_XXX value)
|
|
enum ImGuiMouseSource : int; // -> enum ImGuiMouseSource // Enum; A mouse input source identifier (Mouse, TouchScreen, Pen)
|
|
typedef int ImGuiCol; // -> enum ImGuiCol_ // Enum: A color identifier for styling
|
|
typedef int ImGuiCond; // -> enum ImGuiCond_ // Enum: A condition for many Set*() functions
|
|
typedef int ImGuiDataType; // -> enum ImGuiDataType_ // Enum: A primary data type
|
|
typedef int ImGuiDir; // -> enum ImGuiDir_ // Enum: A cardinal direction
|
|
typedef int ImGuiMouseButton; // -> enum ImGuiMouseButton_ // Enum: A mouse button identifier (0=left, 1=right, 2=middle)
|
|
typedef int ImGuiMouseCursor; // -> enum ImGuiMouseCursor_ // Enum: A mouse cursor shape
|
|
typedef int ImGuiSortDirection; // -> enum ImGuiSortDirection_ // Enum: A sorting direction (ascending or descending)
|
|
typedef int ImGuiStyleVar; // -> enum ImGuiStyleVar_ // Enum: A variable identifier for styling
|
|
typedef int ImGuiTableBgTarget; // -> enum ImGuiTableBgTarget_ // Enum: A color target for TableSetBgColor()
|
|
|
|
// Flags (declared as int for compatibility with old C++, to allow using as flags without overhead, and to not pollute the top of this file)
|
|
// - Tip: Use your programming IDE navigation facilities on the names in the _central column_ below to find the actual flags/enum lists!
|
|
// In Visual Studio IDE: CTRL+comma ("Edit.GoToAll") can follow symbols in comments, whereas CTRL+F12 ("Edit.GoToImplementation") cannot.
|
|
// With Visual Assist installed: ALT+G ("VAssistX.GoToImplementation") can also follow symbols in comments.
|
|
typedef int ImDrawFlags; // -> enum ImDrawFlags_ // Flags: for ImDrawList functions
|
|
typedef int ImDrawListFlags; // -> enum ImDrawListFlags_ // Flags: for ImDrawList instance
|
|
typedef int ImFontAtlasFlags; // -> enum ImFontAtlasFlags_ // Flags: for ImFontAtlas build
|
|
typedef int ImGuiBackendFlags; // -> enum ImGuiBackendFlags_ // Flags: for io.BackendFlags
|
|
typedef int ImGuiButtonFlags; // -> enum ImGuiButtonFlags_ // Flags: for InvisibleButton()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiColorEditFlags; // -> enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_ // Flags: for ColorEdit4(), ColorPicker4() etc.
|
|
typedef int ImGuiConfigFlags; // -> enum ImGuiConfigFlags_ // Flags: for io.ConfigFlags
|
|
typedef int ImGuiComboFlags; // -> enum ImGuiComboFlags_ // Flags: for BeginCombo()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiDragDropFlags; // -> enum ImGuiDragDropFlags_ // Flags: for BeginDragDropSource(), AcceptDragDropPayload()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiFocusedFlags; // -> enum ImGuiFocusedFlags_ // Flags: for IsWindowFocused()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiHoveredFlags; // -> enum ImGuiHoveredFlags_ // Flags: for IsItemHovered(), IsWindowHovered() etc.
|
|
typedef int ImGuiInputTextFlags; // -> enum ImGuiInputTextFlags_ // Flags: for InputText(), InputTextMultiline()
|
|
typedef int
|
|
ImGuiKeyChord; // -> ImGuiKey | ImGuiMod_XXX // Flags: for storage only for now: an ImGuiKey optionally OR-ed with one or more ImGuiMod_XXX values.
|
|
typedef int ImGuiPopupFlags; // -> enum ImGuiPopupFlags_ // Flags: for OpenPopup*(), BeginPopupContext*(), IsPopupOpen()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiSelectableFlags; // -> enum ImGuiSelectableFlags_ // Flags: for Selectable()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiSliderFlags; // -> enum ImGuiSliderFlags_ // Flags: for DragFloat(), DragInt(), SliderFloat(), SliderInt() etc.
|
|
typedef int ImGuiTabBarFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTabBarFlags_ // Flags: for BeginTabBar()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiTabItemFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTabItemFlags_ // Flags: for BeginTabItem()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiTableFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTableFlags_ // Flags: For BeginTable()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiTableColumnFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTableColumnFlags_// Flags: For TableSetupColumn()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiTableRowFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTableRowFlags_ // Flags: For TableNextRow()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiTreeNodeFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ // Flags: for TreeNode(), TreeNodeEx(), CollapsingHeader()
|
|
typedef int ImGuiViewportFlags; // -> enum ImGuiViewportFlags_ // Flags: for ImGuiViewport
|
|
typedef int ImGuiWindowFlags; // -> enum ImGuiWindowFlags_ // Flags: for Begin(), BeginChild()
|
|
|
|
// ImTexture: user data for renderer backend to identify a texture [Compile-time configurable type]
|
|
// - To use something else than an opaque void* pointer: override with e.g. '#define ImTextureID MyTextureType*' in your imconfig.h file.
|
|
// - This can be whatever to you want it to be! read the FAQ about ImTextureID for details.
|
|
#ifndef ImTextureID
|
|
typedef void *ImTextureID; // Default: store a pointer or an integer fitting in a pointer (most renderer backends are ok with that)
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// ImDrawIdx: vertex index. [Compile-time configurable type]
|
|
// - To use 16-bit indices + allow large meshes: backend need to set 'io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset' and handle ImDrawCmd::VtxOffset
|
|
// (recommended).
|
|
// - To use 32-bit indices: override with '#define ImDrawIdx unsigned int' in your imconfig.h file.
|
|
#ifndef ImDrawIdx
|
|
typedef unsigned short ImDrawIdx; // Default: 16-bit (for maximum compatibility with renderer backends)
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Scalar data types
|
|
typedef unsigned int ImGuiID; // A unique ID used by widgets (typically the result of hashing a stack of string)
|
|
typedef signed char ImS8; // 8-bit signed integer
|
|
typedef unsigned char ImU8; // 8-bit unsigned integer
|
|
typedef signed short ImS16; // 16-bit signed integer
|
|
typedef unsigned short ImU16; // 16-bit unsigned integer
|
|
typedef signed int ImS32; // 32-bit signed integer == int
|
|
typedef unsigned int ImU32; // 32-bit unsigned integer (often used to store packed colors)
|
|
typedef signed long long ImS64; // 64-bit signed integer
|
|
typedef unsigned long long ImU64; // 64-bit unsigned integer
|
|
|
|
// Character types
|
|
// (we generally use UTF-8 encoded string in the API. This is storage specifically for a decoded character used for keyboard input and display)
|
|
typedef unsigned short ImWchar16; // A single decoded U16 character/code point. We encode them as multi bytes UTF-8 when used in strings.
|
|
typedef unsigned int ImWchar32; // A single decoded U32 character/code point. We encode them as multi bytes UTF-8 when used in strings.
|
|
#ifdef IMGUI_USE_WCHAR32 // ImWchar [configurable type: override in imconfig.h with '#define IMGUI_USE_WCHAR32' to support Unicode planes 1-16]
|
|
typedef ImWchar32 ImWchar;
|
|
#else
|
|
typedef ImWchar16 ImWchar;
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Callback and functions types
|
|
typedef int (*ImGuiInputTextCallback)(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData *data); // Callback function for ImGui::InputText()
|
|
typedef void (*ImGuiSizeCallback)(ImGuiSizeCallbackData *data); // Callback function for ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints()
|
|
typedef void *(*ImGuiMemAllocFunc)(size_t sz, void *user_data); // Function signature for ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions()
|
|
typedef void (*ImGuiMemFreeFunc)(void *ptr, void *user_data); // Function signature for ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions()
|
|
|
|
// ImVec2: 2D vector used to store positions, sizes etc. [Compile-time configurable type]
|
|
// This is a frequently used type in the API. Consider using IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA to create implicit cast from/to our preferred type.
|
|
IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF
|
|
struct ImVec2 {
|
|
float x, y;
|
|
constexpr ImVec2()
|
|
: x(0.0f)
|
|
, y(0.0f)
|
|
{
|
|
}
|
|
constexpr ImVec2(float _x, float _y)
|
|
: x(_x)
|
|
, y(_y)
|
|
{
|
|
}
|
|
float &operator[](size_t idx)
|
|
{
|
|
IM_ASSERT(idx == 0 || idx == 1);
|
|
return ((float *)(void *)(char *)this)[idx];
|
|
} // We very rarely use this [] operator, so the assert overhead is fine.
|
|
float operator[](size_t idx) const
|
|
{
|
|
IM_ASSERT(idx == 0 || idx == 1);
|
|
return ((const float *)(const void *)(const char *)this)[idx];
|
|
}
|
|
#ifdef IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA
|
|
IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA // Define additional constructors and implicit cast operators in imconfig.h to convert back and forth between your math types and
|
|
// ImVec2.
|
|
#endif
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// ImVec4: 4D vector used to store clipping rectangles, colors etc. [Compile-time configurable type]
|
|
struct ImVec4 {
|
|
float x, y, z, w;
|
|
constexpr ImVec4()
|
|
: x(0.0f)
|
|
, y(0.0f)
|
|
, z(0.0f)
|
|
, w(0.0f)
|
|
{
|
|
}
|
|
constexpr ImVec4(float _x, float _y, float _z, float _w)
|
|
: x(_x)
|
|
, y(_y)
|
|
, z(_z)
|
|
, w(_w)
|
|
{
|
|
}
|
|
#ifdef IM_VEC4_CLASS_EXTRA
|
|
IM_VEC4_CLASS_EXTRA // Define additional constructors and implicit cast operators in imconfig.h to convert back and forth between your math types and
|
|
// ImVec4.
|
|
#endif
|
|
};
|
|
IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Dear ImGui end-user API functions
|
|
// (Note that ImGui:: being a namespace, you can add extra ImGui:: functions in your own separate file. Please don't modify imgui source files!)
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
namespace ImGui
|
|
{
|
|
// Context creation and access
|
|
// - Each context create its own ImFontAtlas by default. You may instance one yourself and pass it to CreateContext() to share a font atlas between contexts.
|
|
// - DLL users: heaps and globals are not shared across DLL boundaries! You will need to call SetCurrentContext() + SetAllocatorFunctions()
|
|
// for each static/DLL boundary you are calling from. Read "Context and Memory Allocators" section of imgui.cpp for details.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiContext *CreateContext(ImFontAtlas *shared_font_atlas = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API void DestroyContext(ImGuiContext *ctx = NULL); // NULL = destroy current context
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiContext *GetCurrentContext();
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetCurrentContext(ImGuiContext *ctx);
|
|
|
|
// Main
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiIO &GetIO(); // access the IO structure (mouse/keyboard/gamepad inputs, time, various configuration options/flags)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiStyle &GetStyle(); // access the Style structure (colors, sizes). Always use PushStyleCol(), PushStyleVar() to modify style mid-frame!
|
|
IMGUI_API void NewFrame(); // start a new Dear ImGui frame, you can submit any command from this point until Render()/EndFrame().
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndFrame(); // ends the Dear ImGui frame. automatically called by Render(). If you don't need to render data (skipping rendering) you may call
|
|
// EndFrame() without Render()... but you'll have wasted CPU already! If you don't need to render, better to not create any windows
|
|
// and not call NewFrame() at all!
|
|
IMGUI_API void Render(); // ends the Dear ImGui frame, finalize the draw data. You can then get call GetDrawData().
|
|
IMGUI_API ImDrawData *GetDrawData(); // valid after Render() and until the next call to NewFrame(). this is what you have to render.
|
|
|
|
// Demo, Debug, Information
|
|
IMGUI_API void ShowDemoWindow(bool *p_open = NULL); // create Demo window. demonstrate most ImGui features. call this to learn about the library! try to make it
|
|
// always available in your application!
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
ShowMetricsWindow(bool *p_open = NULL); // create Metrics/Debugger window. display Dear ImGui internals: windows, draw commands, various internal state, etc.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ShowDebugLogWindow(bool *p_open = NULL); // create Debug Log window. display a simplified log of important dear imgui events.
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
ShowStackToolWindow(bool *p_open = NULL); // create Stack Tool window. hover items with mouse to query information about the source of their unique ID.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ShowAboutWindow(bool *p_open = NULL); // create About window. display Dear ImGui version, credits and build/system information.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ShowStyleEditor(ImGuiStyle *ref = NULL); // add style editor block (not a window). you can pass in a reference ImGuiStyle structure to compare
|
|
// to, revert to and save to (else it uses the default style)
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ShowStyleSelector(const char *label); // add style selector block (not a window), essentially a combo listing the default styles.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ShowFontSelector(const char *label); // add font selector block (not a window), essentially a combo listing the loaded fonts.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ShowUserGuide(); // add basic help/info block (not a window): how to manipulate ImGui as an end-user (mouse/keyboard controls).
|
|
IMGUI_API const char *
|
|
GetVersion(); // get the compiled version string e.g. "1.80 WIP" (essentially the value for IMGUI_VERSION from the compiled version of imgui.cpp)
|
|
|
|
// Styles
|
|
IMGUI_API void StyleColorsDark(ImGuiStyle *dst = NULL); // new, recommended style (default)
|
|
IMGUI_API void StyleColorsLight(ImGuiStyle *dst = NULL); // best used with borders and a custom, thicker font
|
|
IMGUI_API void StyleColorsClassic(ImGuiStyle *dst = NULL); // classic imgui style
|
|
|
|
// Windows
|
|
// - Begin() = push window to the stack and start appending to it. End() = pop window from the stack.
|
|
// - Passing 'bool* p_open != NULL' shows a window-closing widget in the upper-right corner of the window,
|
|
// which clicking will set the boolean to false when clicked.
|
|
// - You may append multiple times to the same window during the same frame by calling Begin()/End() pairs multiple times.
|
|
// Some information such as 'flags' or 'p_open' will only be considered by the first call to Begin().
|
|
// - Begin() return false to indicate the window is collapsed or fully clipped, so you may early out and omit submitting
|
|
// anything to the window. Always call a matching End() for each Begin() call, regardless of its return value!
|
|
// [Important: due to legacy reason, this is inconsistent with most other functions such as BeginMenu/EndMenu,
|
|
// BeginPopup/EndPopup, etc. where the EndXXX call should only be called if the corresponding BeginXXX function
|
|
// returned true. Begin and BeginChild are the only odd ones out. Will be fixed in a future update.]
|
|
// - Note that the bottom of window stack always contains a window called "Debug".
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Begin(const char *name, bool *p_open = NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API void End();
|
|
|
|
// Child Windows
|
|
// - Use child windows to begin into a self-contained independent scrolling/clipping regions within a host window. Child windows can embed their own child.
|
|
// - For each independent axis of 'size': ==0.0f: use remaining host window size / >0.0f: fixed size / <0.0f: use remaining window size minus abs(size) / Each
|
|
// axis can use a different mode, e.g. ImVec2(0,400).
|
|
// - BeginChild() returns false to indicate the window is collapsed or fully clipped, so you may early out and omit submitting anything to the window.
|
|
// Always call a matching EndChild() for each BeginChild() call, regardless of its return value.
|
|
// [Important: due to legacy reason, this is inconsistent with most other functions such as BeginMenu/EndMenu,
|
|
// BeginPopup/EndPopup, etc. where the EndXXX call should only be called if the corresponding BeginXXX function
|
|
// returned true. Begin and BeginChild are the only odd ones out. Will be fixed in a future update.]
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginChild(const char *str_id, const ImVec2 &size = ImVec2(0, 0), bool border = false, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginChild(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2 &size = ImVec2(0, 0), bool border = false, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndChild();
|
|
|
|
// Windows Utilities
|
|
// - 'current window' = the window we are appending into while inside a Begin()/End() block. 'next window' = next window we will Begin() into.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowAppearing();
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowCollapsed();
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags flags = 0); // is current window focused? or its root/child, depending on flags. see flags for options.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags = 0); // is current window hovered (and typically: not blocked by a popup/modal)? see flags for options.
|
|
// NB: If you are trying to check whether your mouse should be dispatched to imgui or to your app,
|
|
// you should use the 'io.WantCaptureMouse' boolean for that! Please read the FAQ!
|
|
IMGUI_API ImDrawList *GetWindowDrawList(); // get draw list associated to the current window, to append your own drawing primitives
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetWindowPos(); // get current window position in screen space (note: it is unlikely you need to use this. Consider using current layout pos
|
|
// instead, GetScreenCursorPos())
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetWindowSize(); // get current window size (note: it is unlikely you need to use this. Consider using GetScreenCursorPos() and e.g.
|
|
// GetContentRegionAvail() instead)
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetWindowWidth(); // get current window width (shortcut for GetWindowSize().x)
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetWindowHeight(); // get current window height (shortcut for GetWindowSize().y)
|
|
|
|
// Window manipulation
|
|
// - Prefer using SetNextXXX functions (before Begin) rather that SetXXX functions (after Begin).
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
SetNextWindowPos(const ImVec2 &pos,
|
|
ImGuiCond cond = 0,
|
|
const ImVec2 &pivot = ImVec2(0, 0)); // set next window position. call before Begin(). use pivot=(0.5f,0.5f) to center on given point, etc.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowSize(const ImVec2 &size,
|
|
ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set next window size. set axis to 0.0f to force an auto-fit on this axis. call before Begin()
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(const ImVec2 &size_min,
|
|
const ImVec2 &size_max,
|
|
ImGuiSizeCallback custom_callback = NULL,
|
|
void *custom_callback_data = NULL); // set next window size limits. use -1,-1 on either X/Y axis to preserve the current size.
|
|
// Sizes will be rounded down. Use callback to apply non-trivial programmatic constraints.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowContentSize(
|
|
const ImVec2 &size); // set next window content size (~ scrollable client area, which enforce the range of scrollbars). Not including window decorations
|
|
// (title bar, menu bar, etc.) nor WindowPadding. set an axis to 0.0f to leave it automatic. call before Begin()
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set next window collapsed state. call before Begin()
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowFocus(); // set next window to be focused / top-most. call before Begin()
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowScroll(const ImVec2 &scroll); // set next window scrolling value (use < 0.0f to not affect a given axis).
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowBgAlpha(float alpha); // set next window background color alpha. helper to easily override the Alpha component of
|
|
// ImGuiCol_WindowBg/ChildBg/PopupBg. you may also use ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetWindowPos(const ImVec2 &pos, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // (not recommended) set current window position - call within Begin()/End(). prefer using
|
|
// SetNextWindowPos(), as this may incur tearing and side-effects.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetWindowSize(const ImVec2 &size,
|
|
ImGuiCond cond = 0); // (not recommended) set current window size - call within Begin()/End(). set to ImVec2(0, 0) to force an
|
|
// auto-fit. prefer using SetNextWindowSize(), as this may incur tearing and minor side-effects.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed,
|
|
ImGuiCond cond = 0); // (not recommended) set current window collapsed state. prefer using SetNextWindowCollapsed().
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetWindowFocus(); // (not recommended) set current window to be focused / top-most. prefer using SetNextWindowFocus().
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetWindowFontScale(float scale); // [OBSOLETE] set font scale. Adjust IO.FontGlobalScale if you want to scale all windows. This is an old API!
|
|
// For correct scaling, prefer to reload font + rebuild ImFontAtlas + call style.ScaleAllSizes().
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetWindowPos(const char *name, const ImVec2 &pos, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set named window position.
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
SetWindowSize(const char *name, const ImVec2 &size, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set named window size. set axis to 0.0f to force an auto-fit on this axis.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetWindowCollapsed(const char *name, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set named window collapsed state
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetWindowFocus(const char *name); // set named window to be focused / top-most. use NULL to remove focus.
|
|
|
|
// Content region
|
|
// - Retrieve available space from a given point. GetContentRegionAvail() is frequently useful.
|
|
// - Those functions are bound to be redesigned (they are confusing, incomplete and the Min/Max return values are in local window coordinates which increases
|
|
// confusion)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetContentRegionAvail(); // == GetContentRegionMax() - GetCursorPos()
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2
|
|
GetContentRegionMax(); // current content boundaries (typically window boundaries including scrolling, or current column boundaries), in windows coordinates
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetWindowContentRegionMin(); // content boundaries min for the full window (roughly (0,0)-Scroll), in window coordinates
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetWindowContentRegionMax(); // content boundaries max for the full window (roughly (0,0)+Size-Scroll) where Size can be overridden with
|
|
// SetNextWindowContentSize(), in window coordinates
|
|
|
|
// Windows Scrolling
|
|
// - Any change of Scroll will be applied at the beginning of next frame in the first call to Begin().
|
|
// - You may instead use SetNextWindowScroll() prior to calling Begin() to avoid this delay, as an alternative to using SetScrollX()/SetScrollY().
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetScrollX(); // get scrolling amount [0 .. GetScrollMaxX()]
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetScrollY(); // get scrolling amount [0 .. GetScrollMaxY()]
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetScrollX(float scroll_x); // set scrolling amount [0 .. GetScrollMaxX()]
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetScrollY(float scroll_y); // set scrolling amount [0 .. GetScrollMaxY()]
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetScrollMaxX(); // get maximum scrolling amount ~~ ContentSize.x - WindowSize.x - DecorationsSize.x
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetScrollMaxY(); // get maximum scrolling amount ~~ ContentSize.y - WindowSize.y - DecorationsSize.y
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
SetScrollHereX(float center_x_ratio = 0.5f); // adjust scrolling amount to make current cursor position visible. center_x_ratio=0.0: left, 0.5: center, 1.0:
|
|
// right. When using to make a "default/current item" visible, consider using SetItemDefaultFocus() instead.
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
SetScrollHereY(float center_y_ratio = 0.5f); // adjust scrolling amount to make current cursor position visible. center_y_ratio=0.0: top, 0.5: center, 1.0:
|
|
// bottom. When using to make a "default/current item" visible, consider using SetItemDefaultFocus() instead.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetScrollFromPosX(
|
|
float local_x,
|
|
float center_x_ratio = 0.5f); // adjust scrolling amount to make given position visible. Generally GetCursorStartPos() + offset to compute a valid position.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetScrollFromPosY(
|
|
float local_y,
|
|
float center_y_ratio = 0.5f); // adjust scrolling amount to make given position visible. Generally GetCursorStartPos() + offset to compute a valid position.
|
|
|
|
// Parameters stacks (shared)
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushFont(ImFont *font); // use NULL as a shortcut to push default font
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopFont();
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, ImU32 col); // modify a style color. always use this if you modify the style after NewFrame().
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, const ImVec4 &col);
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopStyleColor(int count = 1);
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar idx, float val); // modify a style float variable. always use this if you modify the style after NewFrame().
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar idx, const ImVec2 &val); // modify a style ImVec2 variable. always use this if you modify the style after NewFrame().
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopStyleVar(int count = 1);
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
PushTabStop(bool tab_stop); // == tab stop enable. Allow focusing using TAB/Shift-TAB, enabled by default but you can disable it for certain widgets
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopTabStop();
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
PushButtonRepeat(bool repeat); // in 'repeat' mode, Button*() functions return repeated true in a typematic manner (using io.KeyRepeatDelay/io.KeyRepeatRate
|
|
// setting). Note that you can call IsItemActive() after any Button() to tell if the button is held in the current frame.
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopButtonRepeat();
|
|
|
|
// Parameters stacks (current window)
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushItemWidth(float item_width); // push width of items for common large "item+label" widgets. >0.0f: width in pixels, <0.0f align xx pixels to
|
|
// the right of window (so -FLT_MIN always align width to the right side).
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopItemWidth();
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextItemWidth(float item_width); // set width of the _next_ common large "item+label" widget. >0.0f: width in pixels, <0.0f align xx pixels to
|
|
// the right of window (so -FLT_MIN always align width to the right side)
|
|
IMGUI_API float
|
|
CalcItemWidth(); // width of item given pushed settings and current cursor position. NOT necessarily the width of last item unlike most 'Item' functions.
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushTextWrapPos(float wrap_local_pos_x = 0.0f); // push word-wrapping position for Text*() commands. < 0.0f: no wrapping; 0.0f: wrap to end of
|
|
// window (or column); > 0.0f: wrap at 'wrap_pos_x' position in window local space
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopTextWrapPos();
|
|
|
|
// Style read access
|
|
// - Use the ShowStyleEditor() function to interactively see/edit the colors.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFont *GetFont(); // get current font
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetFontSize(); // get current font size (= height in pixels) of current font with current scale applied
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetFontTexUvWhitePixel(); // get UV coordinate for a while pixel, useful to draw custom shapes via the ImDrawList API
|
|
IMGUI_API ImU32 GetColorU32(ImGuiCol idx, float alpha_mul = 1.0f); // retrieve given style color with style alpha applied and optional extra alpha multiplier,
|
|
// packed as a 32-bit value suitable for ImDrawList
|
|
IMGUI_API ImU32 GetColorU32(const ImVec4 &col); // retrieve given color with style alpha applied, packed as a 32-bit value suitable for ImDrawList
|
|
IMGUI_API ImU32 GetColorU32(ImU32 col); // retrieve given color with style alpha applied, packed as a 32-bit value suitable for ImDrawList
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImVec4 &GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol idx); // retrieve style color as stored in ImGuiStyle structure. use to feed back into PushStyleColor(),
|
|
// otherwise use GetColorU32() to get style color with style alpha baked in.
|
|
|
|
// Cursor / Layout
|
|
// - By "cursor" we mean the current output position.
|
|
// - The typical widget behavior is to output themselves at the current cursor position, then move the cursor one line down.
|
|
// - You can call SameLine() between widgets to undo the last carriage return and output at the right of the preceding widget.
|
|
// - Attention! We currently have inconsistencies between window-local and absolute positions we will aim to fix with future API:
|
|
// Window-local coordinates: SameLine(), GetCursorPos(), SetCursorPos(), GetCursorStartPos(), GetContentRegionMax(), GetWindowContentRegion*(),
|
|
// PushTextWrapPos() Absolute coordinate: GetCursorScreenPos(), SetCursorScreenPos(), all ImDrawList:: functions.
|
|
IMGUI_API void Separator(); // separator, generally horizontal. inside a menu bar or in horizontal layout mode, this becomes a vertical separator.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SameLine(float offset_from_start_x = 0.0f,
|
|
float spacing = -1.0f); // call between widgets or groups to layout them horizontally. X position given in window coordinates.
|
|
IMGUI_API void NewLine(); // undo a SameLine() or force a new line when in a horizontal-layout context.
|
|
IMGUI_API void Spacing(); // add vertical spacing.
|
|
IMGUI_API void Dummy(const ImVec2 &size); // add a dummy item of given size. unlike InvisibleButton(), Dummy() won't take the mouse click or be navigable into.
|
|
IMGUI_API void Indent(float indent_w = 0.0f); // move content position toward the right, by indent_w, or style.IndentSpacing if indent_w <= 0
|
|
IMGUI_API void Unindent(float indent_w = 0.0f); // move content position back to the left, by indent_w, or style.IndentSpacing if indent_w <= 0
|
|
IMGUI_API void BeginGroup(); // lock horizontal starting position
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndGroup(); // unlock horizontal starting position + capture the whole group bounding box into one "item" (so you can use IsItemHovered() or
|
|
// layout primitives such as SameLine() on whole group, etc.)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorPos(); // cursor position in window coordinates (relative to window position)
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetCursorPosX(); // (some functions are using window-relative coordinates, such as: GetCursorPos, GetCursorStartPos, GetContentRegionMax,
|
|
// GetWindowContentRegion* etc.
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetCursorPosY(); // other functions such as GetCursorScreenPos or everything in ImDrawList::
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetCursorPos(const ImVec2 &local_pos); // are using the main, absolute coordinate system.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetCursorPosX(float local_x); // GetWindowPos() + GetCursorPos() == GetCursorScreenPos() etc.)
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetCursorPosY(float local_y); //
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorStartPos(); // initial cursor position in window coordinates
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2
|
|
GetCursorScreenPos(); // cursor position in absolute coordinates (useful to work with ImDrawList API). generally top-left == GetMainViewport()->Pos == (0,0) in
|
|
// single viewport mode, and bottom-right == GetMainViewport()->Pos+Size == io.DisplaySize in single-viewport mode.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetCursorScreenPos(const ImVec2 &pos); // cursor position in absolute coordinates
|
|
IMGUI_API void AlignTextToFramePadding(); // vertically align upcoming text baseline to FramePadding.y so that it will align properly to regularly framed items
|
|
// (call if you have text on a line before a framed item)
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetTextLineHeight(); // ~ FontSize
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing(); // ~ FontSize + style.ItemSpacing.y (distance in pixels between 2 consecutive lines of text)
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetFrameHeight(); // ~ FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2
|
|
IMGUI_API float
|
|
GetFrameHeightWithSpacing(); // ~ FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2 + style.ItemSpacing.y (distance in pixels between 2 consecutive lines of framed widgets)
|
|
|
|
// ID stack/scopes
|
|
// Read the FAQ (docs/FAQ.md or http://dearimgui.com/faq) for more details about how ID are handled in dear imgui.
|
|
// - Those questions are answered and impacted by understanding of the ID stack system:
|
|
// - "Q: Why is my widget not reacting when I click on it?"
|
|
// - "Q: How can I have widgets with an empty label?"
|
|
// - "Q: How can I have multiple widgets with the same label?"
|
|
// - Short version: ID are hashes of the entire ID stack. If you are creating widgets in a loop you most likely
|
|
// want to push a unique identifier (e.g. object pointer, loop index) to uniquely differentiate them.
|
|
// - You can also use the "Label##foobar" syntax within widget label to distinguish them from each others.
|
|
// - In this header file we use the "label"/"name" terminology to denote a string that will be displayed + used as an ID,
|
|
// whereas "str_id" denote a string that is only used as an ID and not normally displayed.
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushID(const char *str_id); // push string into the ID stack (will hash string).
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushID(const char *str_id_begin, const char *str_id_end); // push string into the ID stack (will hash string).
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushID(const void *ptr_id); // push pointer into the ID stack (will hash pointer).
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushID(int int_id); // push integer into the ID stack (will hash integer).
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopID(); // pop from the ID stack.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiID
|
|
GetID(const char *str_id); // calculate unique ID (hash of whole ID stack + given parameter). e.g. if you want to query into ImGuiStorage yourself
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetID(const char *str_id_begin, const char *str_id_end);
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetID(const void *ptr_id);
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Text
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
TextUnformatted(const char *text,
|
|
const char *text_end =
|
|
NULL); // raw text without formatting. Roughly equivalent to Text("%s", text) but: A) doesn't require null terminated string if 'text_end'
|
|
// is specified, B) it's faster, no memory copy is done, no buffer size limits, recommended for long chunks of text.
|
|
IMGUI_API void Text(const char *fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // formatted text
|
|
IMGUI_API void TextV(const char *fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
|
|
IMGUI_API void TextColored(const ImVec4 &col, const char *fmt, ...)
|
|
IM_FMTARGS(2); // shortcut for PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, col); Text(fmt, ...); PopStyleColor();
|
|
IMGUI_API void TextColoredV(const ImVec4 &col, const char *fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2);
|
|
IMGUI_API void TextDisabled(const char *fmt, ...)
|
|
IM_FMTARGS(1); // shortcut for PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]); Text(fmt, ...); PopStyleColor();
|
|
IMGUI_API void TextDisabledV(const char *fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
|
|
IMGUI_API void TextWrapped(const char *fmt, ...)
|
|
IM_FMTARGS(1); // shortcut for PushTextWrapPos(0.0f); Text(fmt, ...); PopTextWrapPos();. Note that this won't work on an auto-resizing window if there's no
|
|
// other widgets to extend the window width, yoy may need to set a size using SetNextWindowSize().
|
|
IMGUI_API void TextWrappedV(const char *fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
|
|
IMGUI_API void LabelText(const char *label, const char *fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2); // display text+label aligned the same way as value+label widgets
|
|
IMGUI_API void LabelTextV(const char *label, const char *fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2);
|
|
IMGUI_API void BulletText(const char *fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // shortcut for Bullet()+Text()
|
|
IMGUI_API void BulletTextV(const char *fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
|
|
IMGUI_API void SeparatorText(const char *label); // currently: formatted text with an horizontal line
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Main
|
|
// - Most widgets return true when the value has been changed or when pressed/selected
|
|
// - You may also use one of the many IsItemXXX functions (e.g. IsItemActive, IsItemHovered, etc.) to query widget state.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Button(const char *label, const ImVec2 &size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // button
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SmallButton(const char *label); // button with FramePadding=(0,0) to easily embed within text
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InvisibleButton(const char *str_id,
|
|
const ImVec2 &size,
|
|
ImGuiButtonFlags flags = 0); // flexible button behavior without the visuals, frequently useful to build custom behaviors using
|
|
// the public api (along with IsItemActive, IsItemHovered, etc.)
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ArrowButton(const char *str_id, ImGuiDir dir); // square button with an arrow shape
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Checkbox(const char *label, bool *v);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool CheckboxFlags(const char *label, int *flags, int flags_value);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool CheckboxFlags(const char *label, unsigned int *flags, unsigned int flags_value);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool RadioButton(const char *label, bool active); // use with e.g. if (RadioButton("one", my_value==1)) { my_value = 1; }
|
|
IMGUI_API bool RadioButton(const char *label, int *v, int v_button); // shortcut to handle the above pattern when value is an integer
|
|
IMGUI_API void ProgressBar(float fraction, const ImVec2 &size_arg = ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 0), const char *overlay = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API void Bullet(); // draw a small circle + keep the cursor on the same line. advance cursor x position by GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing(), same distance that
|
|
// TreeNode() uses
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Images
|
|
// - Read about ImTextureID here: https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Image-Loading-and-Displaying-Examples
|
|
IMGUI_API void Image(ImTextureID user_texture_id,
|
|
const ImVec2 &size,
|
|
const ImVec2 &uv0 = ImVec2(0, 0),
|
|
const ImVec2 &uv1 = ImVec2(1, 1),
|
|
const ImVec4 &tint_col = ImVec4(1, 1, 1, 1),
|
|
const ImVec4 &border_col = ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0));
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ImageButton(const char *str_id,
|
|
ImTextureID user_texture_id,
|
|
const ImVec2 &size,
|
|
const ImVec2 &uv0 = ImVec2(0, 0),
|
|
const ImVec2 &uv1 = ImVec2(1, 1),
|
|
const ImVec4 &bg_col = ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0),
|
|
const ImVec4 &tint_col = ImVec4(1, 1, 1, 1));
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Combo Box (Dropdown)
|
|
// - The BeginCombo()/EndCombo() api allows you to manage your contents and selection state however you want it, by creating e.g. Selectable() items.
|
|
// - The old Combo() api are helpers over BeginCombo()/EndCombo() which are kept available for convenience purpose. This is analogous to how ListBox are
|
|
// created.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginCombo(const char *label, const char *preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndCombo(); // only call EndCombo() if BeginCombo() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Combo(const char *label, int *current_item, const char *const items[], int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items = -1);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Combo(const char *label,
|
|
int *current_item,
|
|
const char *items_separated_by_zeros,
|
|
int popup_max_height_in_items = -1); // Separate items with \0 within a string, end item-list with \0\0. e.g. "One\0Two\0Three\0"
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Combo(const char *label,
|
|
int *current_item,
|
|
bool (*items_getter)(void *data, int idx, const char **out_text),
|
|
void *data,
|
|
int items_count,
|
|
int popup_max_height_in_items = -1);
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Drag Sliders
|
|
// - CTRL+Click on any drag box to turn them into an input box. Manually input values aren't clamped by default and can go off-bounds. Use
|
|
// ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp to always clamp.
|
|
// - For all the Float2/Float3/Float4/Int2/Int3/Int4 versions of every function, note that a 'float v[X]' function argument is the same as 'float* v',
|
|
// the array syntax is just a way to document the number of elements that are expected to be accessible. You can pass address of your first element out of a
|
|
// contiguous set, e.g. &myvector.x
|
|
// - Adjust format string to decorate the value with a prefix, a suffix, or adapt the editing and display precision e.g. "%.3f" -> 1.234; "%5.2f secs" -> 01.23
|
|
// secs; "Biscuit: %.0f" -> Biscuit: 1; etc.
|
|
// - Format string may also be set to NULL or use the default format ("%f" or "%d").
|
|
// - Speed are per-pixel of mouse movement (v_speed=0.2f: mouse needs to move by 5 pixels to increase value by 1). For gamepad/keyboard navigation, minimum
|
|
// speed is Max(v_speed, minimum_step_at_given_precision).
|
|
// - Use v_min < v_max to clamp edits to given limits. Note that CTRL+Click manual input can override those limits if ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp is not used.
|
|
// - Use v_max = FLT_MAX / INT_MAX etc to avoid clamping to a maximum, same with v_min = -FLT_MAX / INT_MIN to avoid clamping to a minimum.
|
|
// - We use the same sets of flags for DragXXX() and SliderXXX() functions as the features are the same and it makes it easier to swap them.
|
|
// - Legacy: Pre-1.78 there are DragXXX() function signatures that take a final `float power=1.0f' argument instead of the `ImGuiSliderFlags flags=0' argument.
|
|
// If you get a warning converting a float to ImGuiSliderFlags, read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/3361
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragFloat(const char *label,
|
|
float *v,
|
|
float v_speed = 1.0f,
|
|
float v_min = 0.0f,
|
|
float v_max = 0.0f,
|
|
const char *format = "%.3f",
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); // If v_min >= v_max we have no bound
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragFloat2(const char *label,
|
|
float v[2],
|
|
float v_speed = 1.0f,
|
|
float v_min = 0.0f,
|
|
float v_max = 0.0f,
|
|
const char *format = "%.3f",
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragFloat3(const char *label,
|
|
float v[3],
|
|
float v_speed = 1.0f,
|
|
float v_min = 0.0f,
|
|
float v_max = 0.0f,
|
|
const char *format = "%.3f",
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragFloat4(const char *label,
|
|
float v[4],
|
|
float v_speed = 1.0f,
|
|
float v_min = 0.0f,
|
|
float v_max = 0.0f,
|
|
const char *format = "%.3f",
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragFloatRange2(const char *label,
|
|
float *v_current_min,
|
|
float *v_current_max,
|
|
float v_speed = 1.0f,
|
|
float v_min = 0.0f,
|
|
float v_max = 0.0f,
|
|
const char *format = "%.3f",
|
|
const char *format_max = NULL,
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragInt(const char *label,
|
|
int *v,
|
|
float v_speed = 1.0f,
|
|
int v_min = 0,
|
|
int v_max = 0,
|
|
const char *format = "%d",
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); // If v_min >= v_max we have no bound
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragInt2(const char *label, int v[2], float v_speed = 1.0f, int v_min = 0, int v_max = 0, const char *format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragInt3(const char *label, int v[3], float v_speed = 1.0f, int v_min = 0, int v_max = 0, const char *format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragInt4(const char *label, int v[4], float v_speed = 1.0f, int v_min = 0, int v_max = 0, const char *format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragIntRange2(const char *label,
|
|
int *v_current_min,
|
|
int *v_current_max,
|
|
float v_speed = 1.0f,
|
|
int v_min = 0,
|
|
int v_max = 0,
|
|
const char *format = "%d",
|
|
const char *format_max = NULL,
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragScalar(const char *label,
|
|
ImGuiDataType data_type,
|
|
void *p_data,
|
|
float v_speed = 1.0f,
|
|
const void *p_min = NULL,
|
|
const void *p_max = NULL,
|
|
const char *format = NULL,
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DragScalarN(const char *label,
|
|
ImGuiDataType data_type,
|
|
void *p_data,
|
|
int components,
|
|
float v_speed = 1.0f,
|
|
const void *p_min = NULL,
|
|
const void *p_max = NULL,
|
|
const char *format = NULL,
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Regular Sliders
|
|
// - CTRL+Click on any slider to turn them into an input box. Manually input values aren't clamped by default and can go off-bounds. Use
|
|
// ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp to always clamp.
|
|
// - Adjust format string to decorate the value with a prefix, a suffix, or adapt the editing and display precision e.g. "%.3f" -> 1.234; "%5.2f secs" -> 01.23
|
|
// secs; "Biscuit: %.0f" -> Biscuit: 1; etc.
|
|
// - Format string may also be set to NULL or use the default format ("%f" or "%d").
|
|
// - Legacy: Pre-1.78 there are SliderXXX() function signatures that take a final `float power=1.0f' argument instead of the `ImGuiSliderFlags flags=0'
|
|
// argument.
|
|
// If you get a warning converting a float to ImGuiSliderFlags, read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/3361
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderFloat(const char *label,
|
|
float *v,
|
|
float v_min,
|
|
float v_max,
|
|
const char *format = "%.3f",
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); // adjust format to decorate the value with a prefix or a suffix for in-slider labels or unit display.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderFloat2(const char *label, float v[2], float v_min, float v_max, const char *format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderFloat3(const char *label, float v[3], float v_min, float v_max, const char *format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderFloat4(const char *label, float v[4], float v_min, float v_max, const char *format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderAngle(const char *label,
|
|
float *v_rad,
|
|
float v_degrees_min = -360.0f,
|
|
float v_degrees_max = +360.0f,
|
|
const char *format = "%.0f deg",
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderInt(const char *label, int *v, int v_min, int v_max, const char *format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderInt2(const char *label, int v[2], int v_min, int v_max, const char *format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderInt3(const char *label, int v[3], int v_min, int v_max, const char *format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderInt4(const char *label, int v[4], int v_min, int v_max, const char *format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderScalar(const char *label,
|
|
ImGuiDataType data_type,
|
|
void *p_data,
|
|
const void *p_min,
|
|
const void *p_max,
|
|
const char *format = NULL,
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool SliderScalarN(const char *label,
|
|
ImGuiDataType data_type,
|
|
void *p_data,
|
|
int components,
|
|
const void *p_min,
|
|
const void *p_max,
|
|
const char *format = NULL,
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool VSliderFloat(const char *label, const ImVec2 &size, float *v, float v_min, float v_max, const char *format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool VSliderInt(const char *label, const ImVec2 &size, int *v, int v_min, int v_max, const char *format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool VSliderScalar(const char *label,
|
|
const ImVec2 &size,
|
|
ImGuiDataType data_type,
|
|
void *p_data,
|
|
const void *p_min,
|
|
const void *p_max,
|
|
const char *format = NULL,
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Input with Keyboard
|
|
// - If you want to use InputText() with std::string or any custom dynamic string type, see misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h and comments in imgui_demo.cpp.
|
|
// - Most of the ImGuiInputTextFlags flags are only useful for InputText() and not for InputFloatX, InputIntX, InputDouble etc.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool
|
|
InputText(const char *label, char *buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback = NULL, void *user_data = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputTextMultiline(const char *label,
|
|
char *buf,
|
|
size_t buf_size,
|
|
const ImVec2 &size = ImVec2(0, 0),
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0,
|
|
ImGuiInputTextCallback callback = NULL,
|
|
void *user_data = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputTextWithHint(const char *label,
|
|
const char *hint,
|
|
char *buf,
|
|
size_t buf_size,
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0,
|
|
ImGuiInputTextCallback callback = NULL,
|
|
void *user_data = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputFloat(const char *label, float *v, float step = 0.0f, float step_fast = 0.0f, const char *format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputFloat2(const char *label, float v[2], const char *format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputFloat3(const char *label, float v[3], const char *format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputFloat4(const char *label, float v[4], const char *format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputInt(const char *label, int *v, int step = 1, int step_fast = 100, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputInt2(const char *label, int v[2], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputInt3(const char *label, int v[3], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputInt4(const char *label, int v[4], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputDouble(const char *label, double *v, double step = 0.0, double step_fast = 0.0, const char *format = "%.6f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputScalar(const char *label,
|
|
ImGuiDataType data_type,
|
|
void *p_data,
|
|
const void *p_step = NULL,
|
|
const void *p_step_fast = NULL,
|
|
const char *format = NULL,
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool InputScalarN(const char *label,
|
|
ImGuiDataType data_type,
|
|
void *p_data,
|
|
int components,
|
|
const void *p_step = NULL,
|
|
const void *p_step_fast = NULL,
|
|
const char *format = NULL,
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Color Editor/Picker (tip: the ColorEdit* functions have a little color square that can be left-clicked to open a picker, and right-clicked to open
|
|
// an option menu.)
|
|
// - Note that in C++ a 'float v[X]' function argument is the _same_ as 'float* v', the array syntax is just a way to document the number of elements that are
|
|
// expected to be accessible.
|
|
// - You can pass the address of a first float element out of a contiguous structure, e.g. &myvector.x
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ColorEdit3(const char *label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ColorEdit4(const char *label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ColorPicker3(const char *label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ColorPicker4(const char *label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0, const float *ref_col = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ColorButton(const char *desc_id,
|
|
const ImVec4 &col,
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0,
|
|
const ImVec2 &size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // display a color square/button, hover for details, return true when pressed.
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags flags); // initialize current options (generally on application startup) if you want to select a default format, picker
|
|
// type, etc. User will be able to change many settings, unless you pass the _NoOptions flag to your calls.
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Trees
|
|
// - TreeNode functions return true when the node is open, in which case you need to also call TreePop() when you are finished displaying the tree node
|
|
// contents.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNode(const char *label);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNode(const char *str_id, const char *fmt, ...)
|
|
IM_FMTARGS(2); // helper variation to easily decorelate the id from the displayed string. Read the FAQ about why and how to use ID. to align arbitrary text
|
|
// at the same level as a TreeNode() you can use Bullet().
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNode(const void *ptr_id, const char *fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2); // "
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeV(const char *str_id, const char *fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeV(const void *ptr_id, const char *fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeEx(const char *label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeEx(const char *str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char *fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(3);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeEx(const void *ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char *fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(3);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeExV(const char *str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char *fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(3);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeExV(const void *ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char *fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(3);
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
TreePush(const char *str_id); // ~ Indent()+PushId(). Already called by TreeNode() when returning true, but you can call TreePush/TreePop yourself if desired.
|
|
IMGUI_API void TreePush(const void *ptr_id); // "
|
|
IMGUI_API void TreePop(); // ~ Unindent()+PopId()
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing(); // horizontal distance preceding label when using TreeNode*() or Bullet() == (g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.x*2)
|
|
// for a regular unframed TreeNode
|
|
IMGUI_API bool CollapsingHeader(
|
|
const char *label,
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = 0); // if returning 'true' the header is open. doesn't indent nor push on ID stack. user doesn't have to call TreePop().
|
|
IMGUI_API bool
|
|
CollapsingHeader(const char *label,
|
|
bool *p_visible,
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = 0); // when 'p_visible != NULL': if '*p_visible==true' display an additional small close button on upper right of
|
|
// the header which will set the bool to false when clicked, if '*p_visible==false' don't display the header.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextItemOpen(bool is_open, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set next TreeNode/CollapsingHeader open state.
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Selectables
|
|
// - A selectable highlights when hovered, and can display another color when selected.
|
|
// - Neighbors selectable extend their highlight bounds in order to leave no gap between them. This is so a series of selected Selectable appear contiguous.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool
|
|
Selectable(const char *label,
|
|
bool selected = false,
|
|
ImGuiSelectableFlags flags = 0,
|
|
const ImVec2 &size =
|
|
ImVec2(0, 0)); // "bool selected" carry the selection state (read-only). Selectable() is clicked is returns true so you can modify your selection
|
|
// state. size.x==0.0: use remaining width, size.x>0.0: specify width. size.y==0.0: use label height, size.y>0.0: specify height
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Selectable(const char *label,
|
|
bool *p_selected,
|
|
ImGuiSelectableFlags flags = 0,
|
|
const ImVec2 &size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // "bool* p_selected" point to the selection state (read-write), as a convenient helper.
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: List Boxes
|
|
// - This is essentially a thin wrapper to using BeginChild/EndChild with some stylistic changes.
|
|
// - The BeginListBox()/EndListBox() api allows you to manage your contents and selection state however you want it, by creating e.g. Selectable() or any items.
|
|
// - The simplified/old ListBox() api are helpers over BeginListBox()/EndListBox() which are kept available for convenience purpose. This is analoguous to how
|
|
// Combos are created.
|
|
// - Choose frame width: size.x > 0.0f: custom / size.x < 0.0f or -FLT_MIN: right-align / size.x = 0.0f (default): use current ItemWidth
|
|
// - Choose frame height: size.y > 0.0f: custom / size.y < 0.0f or -FLT_MIN: bottom-align / size.y = 0.0f (default): arbitrary default height which can fit
|
|
// ~7 items
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginListBox(const char *label, const ImVec2 &size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // open a framed scrolling region
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndListBox(); // only call EndListBox() if BeginListBox() returned true!
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ListBox(const char *label, int *current_item, const char *const items[], int items_count, int height_in_items = -1);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ListBox(const char *label,
|
|
int *current_item,
|
|
bool (*items_getter)(void *data, int idx, const char **out_text),
|
|
void *data,
|
|
int items_count,
|
|
int height_in_items = -1);
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Data Plotting
|
|
// - Consider using ImPlot (https://github.com/epezent/implot) which is much better!
|
|
IMGUI_API void PlotLines(const char *label,
|
|
const float *values,
|
|
int values_count,
|
|
int values_offset = 0,
|
|
const char *overlay_text = NULL,
|
|
float scale_min = FLT_MAX,
|
|
float scale_max = FLT_MAX,
|
|
ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0),
|
|
int stride = sizeof(float));
|
|
IMGUI_API void PlotLines(const char *label,
|
|
float (*values_getter)(void *data, int idx),
|
|
void *data,
|
|
int values_count,
|
|
int values_offset = 0,
|
|
const char *overlay_text = NULL,
|
|
float scale_min = FLT_MAX,
|
|
float scale_max = FLT_MAX,
|
|
ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0));
|
|
IMGUI_API void PlotHistogram(const char *label,
|
|
const float *values,
|
|
int values_count,
|
|
int values_offset = 0,
|
|
const char *overlay_text = NULL,
|
|
float scale_min = FLT_MAX,
|
|
float scale_max = FLT_MAX,
|
|
ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0),
|
|
int stride = sizeof(float));
|
|
IMGUI_API void PlotHistogram(const char *label,
|
|
float (*values_getter)(void *data, int idx),
|
|
void *data,
|
|
int values_count,
|
|
int values_offset = 0,
|
|
const char *overlay_text = NULL,
|
|
float scale_min = FLT_MAX,
|
|
float scale_max = FLT_MAX,
|
|
ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0));
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Value() Helpers.
|
|
// - Those are merely shortcut to calling Text() with a format string. Output single value in "name: value" format (tip: freely declare more in your code to
|
|
// handle your types. you can add functions to the ImGui namespace)
|
|
IMGUI_API void Value(const char *prefix, bool b);
|
|
IMGUI_API void Value(const char *prefix, int v);
|
|
IMGUI_API void Value(const char *prefix, unsigned int v);
|
|
IMGUI_API void Value(const char *prefix, float v, const char *float_format = NULL);
|
|
|
|
// Widgets: Menus
|
|
// - Use BeginMenuBar() on a window ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar to append to its menu bar.
|
|
// - Use BeginMainMenuBar() to create a menu bar at the top of the screen and append to it.
|
|
// - Use BeginMenu() to create a menu. You can call BeginMenu() multiple time with the same identifier to append more items to it.
|
|
// - Not that MenuItem() keyboardshortcuts are displayed as a convenience but _not processed_ by Dear ImGui at the moment.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginMenuBar(); // append to menu-bar of current window (requires ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar flag set on parent window).
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndMenuBar(); // only call EndMenuBar() if BeginMenuBar() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginMainMenuBar(); // create and append to a full screen menu-bar.
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndMainMenuBar(); // only call EndMainMenuBar() if BeginMainMenuBar() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginMenu(const char *label, bool enabled = true); // create a sub-menu entry. only call EndMenu() if this returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndMenu(); // only call EndMenu() if BeginMenu() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API bool MenuItem(const char *label, const char *shortcut = NULL, bool selected = false, bool enabled = true); // return true when activated.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool MenuItem(const char *label,
|
|
const char *shortcut,
|
|
bool *p_selected,
|
|
bool enabled = true); // return true when activated + toggle (*p_selected) if p_selected != NULL
|
|
|
|
// Tooltips
|
|
// - Tooltips are windows following the mouse. They do not take focus away.
|
|
// - A tooltip window can contain items of any types. SetTooltip() is a shortcut for the 'if (BeginTooltip()) { Text(...); EndTooltip(); }' idiom.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginTooltip(); // begin/append a tooltip window.
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndTooltip(); // only call EndTooltip() if BeginTooltip()/BeginItemTooltip() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetTooltip(const char *fmt, ...)
|
|
IM_FMTARGS(1); // set a text-only tooltip. Often used after a ImGui::IsItemHovered() check. Override any previous call to SetTooltip().
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetTooltipV(const char *fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
|
|
|
|
// Tooltips: helpers for showing a tooltip when hovering an item
|
|
// - BeginItemTooltip() is a shortcut for the 'if (IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_Tooltip) && BeginTooltip())' idiom.
|
|
// - SetItemTooltip() is a shortcut for the 'if (IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_Tooltip)) { SetTooltip(...); }' idiom.
|
|
// - Where 'ImGuiHoveredFlags_Tooltip' itself is a shortcut to use 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipMouse' or 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipNav' depending on active
|
|
// input type. For mouse it defaults to 'ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary | ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort'.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginItemTooltip(); // begin/append a tooltip window if preceding item was hovered.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetItemTooltip(const char *fmt, ...)
|
|
IM_FMTARGS(1); // set a text-only tooltip if preceeding item was hovered. override any previous call to SetTooltip().
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetItemTooltipV(const char *fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
|
|
|
|
// Popups, Modals
|
|
// - They block normal mouse hovering detection (and therefore most mouse interactions) behind them.
|
|
// - If not modal: they can be closed by clicking anywhere outside them, or by pressing ESCAPE.
|
|
// - Their visibility state (~bool) is held internally instead of being held by the programmer as we are used to with regular Begin*() calls.
|
|
// - The 3 properties above are related: we need to retain popup visibility state in the library because popups may be closed as any time.
|
|
// - You can bypass the hovering restriction by using ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup when calling IsItemHovered() or IsWindowHovered().
|
|
// - IMPORTANT: Popup identifiers are relative to the current ID stack, so OpenPopup and BeginPopup generally needs to be at the same level of the stack.
|
|
// This is sometimes leading to confusing mistakes. May rework this in the future.
|
|
|
|
// Popups: begin/end functions
|
|
// - BeginPopup(): query popup state, if open start appending into the window. Call EndPopup() afterwards. ImGuiWindowFlags are forwarded to the window.
|
|
// - BeginPopupModal(): block every interaction behind the window, cannot be closed by user, add a dimming background, has a title bar.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginPopup(const char *str_id, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); // return true if the popup is open, and you can start outputting to it.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool
|
|
BeginPopupModal(const char *name, bool *p_open = NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); // return true if the modal is open, and you can start outputting to it.
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndPopup(); // only call EndPopup() if BeginPopupXXX() returns true!
|
|
|
|
// Popups: open/close functions
|
|
// - OpenPopup(): set popup state to open. ImGuiPopupFlags are available for opening options.
|
|
// - If not modal: they can be closed by clicking anywhere outside them, or by pressing ESCAPE.
|
|
// - CloseCurrentPopup(): use inside the BeginPopup()/EndPopup() scope to close manually.
|
|
// - CloseCurrentPopup() is called by default by Selectable()/MenuItem() when activated (FIXME: need some options).
|
|
// - Use ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverExistingPopup to avoid opening a popup if there's already one at the same level. This is equivalent to e.g. testing for
|
|
// !IsAnyPopupOpen() prior to OpenPopup().
|
|
// - Use IsWindowAppearing() after BeginPopup() to tell if a window just opened.
|
|
// - IMPORTANT: Notice that for OpenPopupOnItemClick() we exceptionally default flags to 1 (== ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight) for backward compatibility
|
|
// with older API taking 'int mouse_button = 1' parameter
|
|
IMGUI_API void OpenPopup(const char *str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 0); // call to mark popup as open (don't call every frame!).
|
|
IMGUI_API void OpenPopup(ImGuiID id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 0); // id overload to facilitate calling from nested stacks
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
OpenPopupOnItemClick(const char *str_id = NULL,
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 1); // helper to open popup when clicked on last item. Default to ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight == 1.
|
|
// (note: actually triggers on the mouse _released_ event to be consistent with popup behaviors)
|
|
IMGUI_API void CloseCurrentPopup(); // manually close the popup we have begin-ed into.
|
|
|
|
// Popups: open+begin combined functions helpers
|
|
// - Helpers to do OpenPopup+BeginPopup where the Open action is triggered by e.g. hovering an item and right-clicking.
|
|
// - They are convenient to easily create context menus, hence the name.
|
|
// - IMPORTANT: Notice that BeginPopupContextXXX takes ImGuiPopupFlags just like OpenPopup() and unlike BeginPopup(). For full consistency, we may add
|
|
// ImGuiWindowFlags to the BeginPopupContextXXX functions in the future.
|
|
// - IMPORTANT: Notice that we exceptionally default their flags to 1 (== ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight) for backward compatibility with older API taking
|
|
// 'int mouse_button = 1' parameter, so if you add other flags remember to re-add the ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginPopupContextItem(
|
|
const char *str_id = NULL,
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 1); // open+begin popup when clicked on last item. Use str_id==NULL to associate the popup to previous item. If you want to
|
|
// use that on a non-interactive item such as Text() you need to pass in an explicit ID here. read comments in .cpp!
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginPopupContextWindow(const char *str_id = NULL, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 1); // open+begin popup when clicked on current window.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginPopupContextVoid(const char *str_id = NULL,
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 1); // open+begin popup when clicked in void (where there are no windows).
|
|
|
|
// Popups: query functions
|
|
// - IsPopupOpen(): return true if the popup is open at the current BeginPopup() level of the popup stack.
|
|
// - IsPopupOpen() with ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId: return true if any popup is open at the current BeginPopup() level of the popup stack.
|
|
// - IsPopupOpen() with ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId + ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel: return true if any popup is open.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsPopupOpen(const char *str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags flags = 0); // return true if the popup is open.
|
|
|
|
// Tables
|
|
// - Full-featured replacement for old Columns API.
|
|
// - See Demo->Tables for demo code. See top of imgui_tables.cpp for general commentary.
|
|
// - See ImGuiTableFlags_ and ImGuiTableColumnFlags_ enums for a description of available flags.
|
|
// The typical call flow is:
|
|
// - 1. Call BeginTable(), early out if returning false.
|
|
// - 2. Optionally call TableSetupColumn() to submit column name/flags/defaults.
|
|
// - 3. Optionally call TableSetupScrollFreeze() to request scroll freezing of columns/rows.
|
|
// - 4. Optionally call TableHeadersRow() to submit a header row. Names are pulled from TableSetupColumn() data.
|
|
// - 5. Populate contents:
|
|
// - In most situations you can use TableNextRow() + TableSetColumnIndex(N) to start appending into a column.
|
|
// - If you are using tables as a sort of grid, where every column is holding the same type of contents,
|
|
// you may prefer using TableNextColumn() instead of TableNextRow() + TableSetColumnIndex().
|
|
// TableNextColumn() will automatically wrap-around into the next row if needed.
|
|
// - IMPORTANT: Comparatively to the old Columns() API, we need to call TableNextColumn() for the first column!
|
|
// - Summary of possible call flow:
|
|
// --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// TableNextRow() -> TableSetColumnIndex(0) -> Text("Hello 0") -> TableSetColumnIndex(1) -> Text("Hello 1") // OK
|
|
// TableNextRow() -> TableNextColumn() -> Text("Hello 0") -> TableNextColumn() -> Text("Hello 1") // OK
|
|
// TableNextColumn() -> Text("Hello 0") -> TableNextColumn() -> Text("Hello 1") // OK: TableNextColumn() automatically gets
|
|
// to next row!
|
|
// TableNextRow() -> Text("Hello 0") // Not OK! Missing TableSetColumnIndex() or
|
|
// TableNextColumn()! Text will not appear!
|
|
// --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// - 5. Call EndTable()
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginTable(const char *str_id, int column, ImGuiTableFlags flags = 0, const ImVec2 &outer_size = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f), float inner_width = 0.0f);
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndTable(); // only call EndTable() if BeginTable() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API void TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags row_flags = 0, float min_row_height = 0.0f); // append into the first cell of a new row.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TableNextColumn(); // append into the next column (or first column of next row if currently in last column). Return true when column is visible.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TableSetColumnIndex(int column_n); // append into the specified column. Return true when column is visible.
|
|
|
|
// Tables: Headers & Columns declaration
|
|
// - Use TableSetupColumn() to specify label, resizing policy, default width/weight, id, various other flags etc.
|
|
// - Use TableHeadersRow() to create a header row and automatically submit a TableHeader() for each column.
|
|
// Headers are required to perform: reordering, sorting, and opening the context menu.
|
|
// The context menu can also be made available in columns body using ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody.
|
|
// - You may manually submit headers using TableNextRow() + TableHeader() calls, but this is only useful in
|
|
// some advanced use cases (e.g. adding custom widgets in header row).
|
|
// - Use TableSetupScrollFreeze() to lock columns/rows so they stay visible when scrolled.
|
|
IMGUI_API void TableSetupColumn(const char *label, ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags = 0, float init_width_or_weight = 0.0f, ImGuiID user_id = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API void TableSetupScrollFreeze(int cols, int rows); // lock columns/rows so they stay visible when scrolled.
|
|
IMGUI_API void TableHeadersRow(); // submit all headers cells based on data provided to TableSetupColumn() + submit context menu
|
|
IMGUI_API void TableHeader(const char *label); // submit one header cell manually (rarely used)
|
|
|
|
// Tables: Sorting & Miscellaneous functions
|
|
// - Sorting: call TableGetSortSpecs() to retrieve latest sort specs for the table. NULL when not sorting.
|
|
// When 'sort_specs->SpecsDirty == true' you should sort your data. It will be true when sorting specs have
|
|
// changed since last call, or the first time. Make sure to set 'SpecsDirty = false' after sorting,
|
|
// else you may wastefully sort your data every frame!
|
|
// - Functions args 'int column_n' treat the default value of -1 as the same as passing the current column index.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiTableSortSpecs *TableGetSortSpecs(); // get latest sort specs for the table (NULL if not sorting). Lifetime: don't hold on this pointer over
|
|
// multiple frames or past any subsequent call to BeginTable().
|
|
IMGUI_API int TableGetColumnCount(); // return number of columns (value passed to BeginTable)
|
|
IMGUI_API int TableGetColumnIndex(); // return current column index.
|
|
IMGUI_API int TableGetRowIndex(); // return current row index.
|
|
IMGUI_API const char *
|
|
TableGetColumnName(int column_n = -1); // return "" if column didn't have a name declared by TableSetupColumn(). Pass -1 to use current column.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiTableColumnFlags TableGetColumnFlags(
|
|
int column_n = -1); // return column flags so you can query their Enabled/Visible/Sorted/Hovered status flags. Pass -1 to use current column.
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
TableSetColumnEnabled(int column_n,
|
|
bool v); // change user accessible enabled/disabled state of a column. Set to false to hide the column. User can use the context menu to
|
|
// change this themselves (right-click in headers, or right-click in columns body with ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody)
|
|
IMGUI_API void TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget target,
|
|
ImU32 color,
|
|
int column_n = -1); // change the color of a cell, row, or column. See ImGuiTableBgTarget_ flags for details.
|
|
|
|
// Legacy Columns API (prefer using Tables!)
|
|
// - You can also use SameLine(pos_x) to mimic simplified columns.
|
|
IMGUI_API void Columns(int count = 1, const char *id = NULL, bool border = true);
|
|
IMGUI_API void NextColumn(); // next column, defaults to current row or next row if the current row is finished
|
|
IMGUI_API int GetColumnIndex(); // get current column index
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetColumnWidth(int column_index = -1); // get column width (in pixels). pass -1 to use current column
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetColumnWidth(int column_index, float width); // set column width (in pixels). pass -1 to use current column
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetColumnOffset(int column_index = -1); // get position of column line (in pixels, from the left side of the contents region). pass -1 to use
|
|
// current column, otherwise 0..GetColumnsCount() inclusive. column 0 is typically 0.0f
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
SetColumnOffset(int column_index,
|
|
float offset_x); // set position of column line (in pixels, from the left side of the contents region). pass -1 to use current column
|
|
IMGUI_API int GetColumnsCount();
|
|
|
|
// Tab Bars, Tabs
|
|
// - Note: Tabs are automatically created by the docking system (when in 'docking' branch). Use this to create tab bars/tabs yourself.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginTabBar(const char *str_id, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags = 0); // create and append into a TabBar
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndTabBar(); // only call EndTabBar() if BeginTabBar() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginTabItem(const char *label, bool *p_open = NULL, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags = 0); // create a Tab. Returns true if the Tab is selected.
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndTabItem(); // only call EndTabItem() if BeginTabItem() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API bool TabItemButton(const char *label,
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags flags = 0); // create a Tab behaving like a button. return true when clicked. cannot be selected in the tab bar.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetTabItemClosed(
|
|
const char *tab_or_docked_window_label); // notify TabBar or Docking system of a closed tab/window ahead (useful to reduce visual flicker on reorderable tab
|
|
// bars). For tab-bar: call after BeginTabBar() and before Tab submissions. Otherwise call with a window name.
|
|
|
|
// Logging/Capture
|
|
// - All text output from the interface can be captured into tty/file/clipboard. By default, tree nodes are automatically opened during logging.
|
|
IMGUI_API void LogToTTY(int auto_open_depth = -1); // start logging to tty (stdout)
|
|
IMGUI_API void LogToFile(int auto_open_depth = -1, const char *filename = NULL); // start logging to file
|
|
IMGUI_API void LogToClipboard(int auto_open_depth = -1); // start logging to OS clipboard
|
|
IMGUI_API void LogFinish(); // stop logging (close file, etc.)
|
|
IMGUI_API void LogButtons(); // helper to display buttons for logging to tty/file/clipboard
|
|
IMGUI_API void LogText(const char *fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // pass text data straight to log (without being displayed)
|
|
IMGUI_API void LogTextV(const char *fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
|
|
|
|
// Drag and Drop
|
|
// - On source items, call BeginDragDropSource(), if it returns true also call SetDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropSource().
|
|
// - On target candidates, call BeginDragDropTarget(), if it returns true also call AcceptDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropTarget().
|
|
// - If you stop calling BeginDragDropSource() the payload is preserved however it won't have a preview tooltip (we currently display a fallback "..." tooltip,
|
|
// see #1725)
|
|
// - An item can be both drag source and drop target.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginDragDropSource(ImGuiDragDropFlags flags = 0); // call after submitting an item which may be dragged. when this return true, you can call
|
|
// SetDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropSource()
|
|
IMGUI_API bool
|
|
SetDragDropPayload(const char *type,
|
|
const void *data,
|
|
size_t sz,
|
|
ImGuiCond cond = 0); // type is a user defined string of maximum 32 characters. Strings starting with '_' are reserved for dear imgui
|
|
// internal types. Data is copied and held by imgui. Return true when payload has been accepted.
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndDragDropSource(); // only call EndDragDropSource() if BeginDragDropSource() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginDragDropTarget(); // call after submitting an item that may receive a payload. If this returns true, you can call AcceptDragDropPayload() +
|
|
// EndDragDropTarget()
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImGuiPayload *
|
|
AcceptDragDropPayload(const char *type, ImGuiDragDropFlags flags = 0); // accept contents of a given type. If ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery is set you
|
|
// can peek into the payload before the mouse button is released.
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndDragDropTarget(); // only call EndDragDropTarget() if BeginDragDropTarget() returns true!
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImGuiPayload *
|
|
GetDragDropPayload(); // peek directly into the current payload from anywhere. may return NULL. use ImGuiPayload::IsDataType() to test for the payload type.
|
|
|
|
// Disabling [BETA API]
|
|
// - Disable all user interactions and dim items visuals (applying style.DisabledAlpha over current colors)
|
|
// - Those can be nested but it cannot be used to enable an already disabled section (a single BeginDisabled(true) in the stack is enough to keep everything
|
|
// disabled)
|
|
// - BeginDisabled(false) essentially does nothing useful but is provided to facilitate use of boolean expressions. If you can avoid calling
|
|
// BeginDisabled(False)/EndDisabled() best to avoid it.
|
|
IMGUI_API void BeginDisabled(bool disabled = true);
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndDisabled();
|
|
|
|
// Clipping
|
|
// - Mouse hovering is affected by ImGui::PushClipRect() calls, unlike direct calls to ImDrawList::PushClipRect() which are render only.
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushClipRect(const ImVec2 &clip_rect_min, const ImVec2 &clip_rect_max, bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect);
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopClipRect();
|
|
|
|
// Focus, Activation
|
|
// - Prefer using "SetItemDefaultFocus()" over "if (IsWindowAppearing()) SetScrollHereY()" when applicable to signify "this is the default item"
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetItemDefaultFocus(); // make last item the default focused item of a window.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetKeyboardFocusHere(int offset = 0); // focus keyboard on the next widget. Use positive 'offset' to access sub components of a multiple
|
|
// component widget. Use -1 to access previous widget.
|
|
|
|
// Overlapping mode
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
SetNextItemAllowOverlap(); // allow next item to be overlapped by a subsequent item. Useful with invisible buttons, selectable, treenode covering an area where
|
|
// subsequent items may need to be added. Note that both Selectable() and TreeNode() have dedicated flags doing this.
|
|
|
|
// Item/Widgets Utilities and Query Functions
|
|
// - Most of the functions are referring to the previous Item that has been submitted.
|
|
// - See Demo Window under "Widgets->Querying Status" for an interactive visualization of most of those functions.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool
|
|
IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags = 0); // is the last item hovered? (and usable, aka not blocked by a popup, etc.). See ImGuiHoveredFlags for more options.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsItemActive(); // is the last item active? (e.g. button being held, text field being edited. This will continuously return true while holding
|
|
// mouse button on an item. Items that don't interact will always return false)
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsItemFocused(); // is the last item focused for keyboard/gamepad navigation?
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsItemClicked(
|
|
ImGuiMouseButton mouse_button = 0); // is the last item hovered and mouse clicked on? (**) == IsMouseClicked(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered()Important.
|
|
// (**) this is NOT equivalent to the behavior of e.g. Button(). Read comments in function definition.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsItemVisible(); // is the last item visible? (items may be out of sight because of clipping/scrolling)
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsItemEdited(); // did the last item modify its underlying value this frame? or was pressed? This is generally the same as the "bool" return
|
|
// value of many widgets.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsItemActivated(); // was the last item just made active (item was previously inactive).
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsItemDeactivated(); // was the last item just made inactive (item was previously active). Useful for Undo/Redo patterns with widgets that
|
|
// require continuous editing.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool
|
|
IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit(); // was the last item just made inactive and made a value change when it was active? (e.g. Slider/Drag moved). Useful for Undo/Redo
|
|
// patterns with widgets that require continuous editing. Note that you may get false positives (some widgets such as
|
|
// Combo()/ListBox()/Selectable() will return true even when clicking an already selected item).
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsItemToggledOpen(); // was the last item open state toggled? set by TreeNode().
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsAnyItemHovered(); // is any item hovered?
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsAnyItemActive(); // is any item active?
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsAnyItemFocused(); // is any item focused?
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetItemID(); // get ID of last item (~~ often same ImGui::GetID(label) beforehand)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetItemRectMin(); // get upper-left bounding rectangle of the last item (screen space)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetItemRectMax(); // get lower-right bounding rectangle of the last item (screen space)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetItemRectSize(); // get size of last item
|
|
|
|
// Viewports
|
|
// - Currently represents the Platform Window created by the application which is hosting our Dear ImGui windows.
|
|
// - In 'docking' branch with multi-viewport enabled, we extend this concept to have multiple active viewports.
|
|
// - In the future we will extend this concept further to also represent Platform Monitor and support a "no main platform window" operation mode.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiViewport *GetMainViewport(); // return primary/default viewport. This can never be NULL.
|
|
|
|
// Background/Foreground Draw Lists
|
|
IMGUI_API ImDrawList *GetBackgroundDrawList(); // this draw list will be the first rendered one. Useful to quickly draw shapes/text behind dear imgui contents.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImDrawList *GetForegroundDrawList(); // this draw list will be the last rendered one. Useful to quickly draw shapes/text over dear imgui contents.
|
|
|
|
// Miscellaneous Utilities
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsRectVisible(const ImVec2 &size); // test if rectangle (of given size, starting from cursor position) is visible / not clipped.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool
|
|
IsRectVisible(const ImVec2 &rect_min,
|
|
const ImVec2 &rect_max); // test if rectangle (in screen space) is visible / not clipped. to perform coarse clipping on user's side.
|
|
IMGUI_API double GetTime(); // get global imgui time. incremented by io.DeltaTime every frame.
|
|
IMGUI_API int GetFrameCount(); // get global imgui frame count. incremented by 1 every frame.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImDrawListSharedData *GetDrawListSharedData(); // you may use this when creating your own ImDrawList instances.
|
|
IMGUI_API const char *GetStyleColorName(ImGuiCol idx); // get a string corresponding to the enum value (for display, saving, etc.).
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
SetStateStorage(ImGuiStorage *storage); // replace current window storage with our own (if you want to manipulate it yourself, typically clear subsection of it)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiStorage *GetStateStorage();
|
|
IMGUI_API bool BeginChildFrame(ImGuiID id,
|
|
const ImVec2 &size,
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); // helper to create a child window / scrolling region that looks like a normal widget frame
|
|
IMGUI_API void EndChildFrame(); // always call EndChildFrame() regardless of BeginChildFrame() return values (which indicates a collapsed/clipped window)
|
|
|
|
// Text Utilities
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 CalcTextSize(const char *text, const char *text_end = NULL, bool hide_text_after_double_hash = false, float wrap_width = -1.0f);
|
|
|
|
// Color Utilities
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec4 ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(ImU32 in);
|
|
IMGUI_API ImU32 ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(const ImVec4 &in);
|
|
IMGUI_API void ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(float r, float g, float b, float &out_h, float &out_s, float &out_v);
|
|
IMGUI_API void ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(float h, float s, float v, float &out_r, float &out_g, float &out_b);
|
|
|
|
// Inputs Utilities: Keyboard/Mouse/Gamepad
|
|
// - the ImGuiKey enum contains all possible keyboard, mouse and gamepad inputs (e.g. ImGuiKey_A, ImGuiKey_MouseLeft, ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadUp...).
|
|
// - before v1.87, we used ImGuiKey to carry native/user indices as defined by each backends. About use of those legacy ImGuiKey values:
|
|
// - without IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO (legacy support): you can still use your legacy native/user indices (< 512) according to how your backend/engine
|
|
// stored them in io.KeysDown[], but need to cast them to ImGuiKey.
|
|
// - with IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO (this is the way forward): any use of ImGuiKey will assert with key < 512. GetKeyIndex() is pass-through and
|
|
// therefore deprecated (gone if IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO is defined).
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey key); // is key being held.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey key,
|
|
bool repeat = true); // was key pressed (went from !Down to Down)? if repeat=true, uses io.KeyRepeatDelay / KeyRepeatRate
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsKeyReleased(ImGuiKey key); // was key released (went from Down to !Down)?
|
|
IMGUI_API int GetKeyPressedAmount(
|
|
ImGuiKey key,
|
|
float repeat_delay,
|
|
float rate); // uses provided repeat rate/delay. return a count, most often 0 or 1 but might be >1 if RepeatRate is small enough that DeltaTime > RepeatRate
|
|
IMGUI_API const char *GetKeyName(ImGuiKey key); // [DEBUG] returns English name of the key. Those names a provided for debugging purpose and are not meant to be
|
|
// saved persistently not compared.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextFrameWantCaptureKeyboard(
|
|
bool want_capture_keyboard); // Override io.WantCaptureKeyboard flag next frame (said flag is left for your application to handle, typically when true it
|
|
// instructs your app to ignore inputs). e.g. force capture keyboard when your widget is being hovered. This is equivalent to
|
|
// setting "io.WantCaptureKeyboard = want_capture_keyboard"; after the next NewFrame() call.
|
|
|
|
// Inputs Utilities: Mouse specific
|
|
// - To refer to a mouse button, you may use named enums in your code e.g. ImGuiMouseButton_Left, ImGuiMouseButton_Right.
|
|
// - You can also use regular integer: it is forever guaranteed that 0=Left, 1=Right, 2=Middle.
|
|
// - Dragging operations are only reported after mouse has moved a certain distance away from the initial clicking position (see 'lock_threshold' and
|
|
// 'io.MouseDraggingThreshold')
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton button); // is mouse button held?
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton button,
|
|
bool repeat = false); // did mouse button clicked? (went from !Down to Down). Same as GetMouseClickedCount() == 1.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseReleased(ImGuiMouseButton button); // did mouse button released? (went from Down to !Down)
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseDoubleClicked(ImGuiMouseButton button); // did mouse button double-clicked? Same as GetMouseClickedCount() == 2. (note that a double-click
|
|
// will also report IsMouseClicked() == true)
|
|
IMGUI_API int GetMouseClickedCount(ImGuiMouseButton button); // return the number of successive mouse-clicks at the time where a click happen (otherwise 0).
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseHoveringRect(const ImVec2 &r_min,
|
|
const ImVec2 &r_max,
|
|
bool clip = true); // is mouse hovering given bounding rect (in screen space). clipped by current clipping settings, but
|
|
// disregarding of other consideration of focus/window ordering/popup-block.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsMousePosValid(const ImVec2 *mouse_pos = NULL); // by convention we use (-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX) to denote that there is no mouse available
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsAnyMouseDown(); // [WILL OBSOLETE] is any mouse button held? This was designed for backends, but prefer having backend maintain a mask of held
|
|
// mouse buttons, because upcoming input queue system will make this invalid.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetMousePos(); // shortcut to ImGui::GetIO().MousePos provided by user, to be consistent with other calls
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetMousePosOnOpeningCurrentPopup(); // retrieve mouse position at the time of opening popup we have BeginPopup() into (helper to avoid user
|
|
// backing that value themselves)
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton button,
|
|
float lock_threshold = -1.0f); // is mouse dragging? (if lock_threshold < -1.0f, uses io.MouseDraggingThreshold)
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetMouseDragDelta(ImGuiMouseButton button = 0,
|
|
float lock_threshold = -1.0f); // return the delta from the initial clicking position while the mouse button is pressed or
|
|
// was just released. This is locked and return 0.0f until the mouse moves past a distance
|
|
// threshold at least once (if lock_threshold < -1.0f, uses io.MouseDraggingThreshold)
|
|
IMGUI_API void ResetMouseDragDelta(ImGuiMouseButton button = 0); //
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiMouseCursor GetMouseCursor(); // get desired mouse cursor shape. Important: reset in ImGui::NewFrame(), this is updated during the frame. valid
|
|
// before Render(). If you use software rendering by setting io.MouseDrawCursor ImGui will render those for you
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor cursor_type); // set desired mouse cursor shape
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetNextFrameWantCaptureMouse(bool want_capture_mouse); // Override io.WantCaptureMouse flag next frame (said flag is left for your application to
|
|
// handle, typical when true it instucts your app to ignore inputs). This is equivalent to
|
|
// setting "io.WantCaptureMouse = want_capture_mouse;" after the next NewFrame() call.
|
|
|
|
// Clipboard Utilities
|
|
// - Also see the LogToClipboard() function to capture GUI into clipboard, or easily output text data to the clipboard.
|
|
IMGUI_API const char *GetClipboardText();
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetClipboardText(const char *text);
|
|
|
|
// Settings/.Ini Utilities
|
|
// - The disk functions are automatically called if io.IniFilename != NULL (default is "imgui.ini").
|
|
// - Set io.IniFilename to NULL to load/save manually. Read io.WantSaveIniSettings description about handling .ini saving manually.
|
|
// - Important: default value "imgui.ini" is relative to current working dir! Most apps will want to lock this to an absolute path (e.g. same path as
|
|
// executables).
|
|
IMGUI_API void LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(const char *ini_filename); // call after CreateContext() and before the first call to NewFrame(). NewFrame()
|
|
// automatically calls LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(io.IniFilename).
|
|
IMGUI_API void LoadIniSettingsFromMemory(
|
|
const char *ini_data,
|
|
size_t ini_size = 0); // call after CreateContext() and before the first call to NewFrame() to provide .ini data from your own data source.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SaveIniSettingsToDisk(const char *ini_filename); // this is automatically called (if io.IniFilename is not empty) a few seconds after any
|
|
// modification that should be reflected in the .ini file (and also by DestroyContext).
|
|
IMGUI_API const char *
|
|
SaveIniSettingsToMemory(size_t *out_ini_size = NULL); // return a zero-terminated string with the .ini data which you can save by your own mean. call when
|
|
// io.WantSaveIniSettings is set, then save data by your own mean and clear io.WantSaveIniSettings.
|
|
|
|
// Debug Utilities
|
|
IMGUI_API void DebugTextEncoding(const char *text);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool DebugCheckVersionAndDataLayout(const char *version_str,
|
|
size_t sz_io,
|
|
size_t sz_style,
|
|
size_t sz_vec2,
|
|
size_t sz_vec4,
|
|
size_t sz_drawvert,
|
|
size_t sz_drawidx); // This is called by IMGUI_CHECKVERSION() macro.
|
|
|
|
// Memory Allocators
|
|
// - Those functions are not reliant on the current context.
|
|
// - DLL users: heaps and globals are not shared across DLL boundaries! You will need to call SetCurrentContext() + SetAllocatorFunctions()
|
|
// for each static/DLL boundary you are calling from. Read "Context and Memory Allocators" section of imgui.cpp for more details.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetAllocatorFunctions(ImGuiMemAllocFunc alloc_func, ImGuiMemFreeFunc free_func, void *user_data = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API void GetAllocatorFunctions(ImGuiMemAllocFunc *p_alloc_func, ImGuiMemFreeFunc *p_free_func, void **p_user_data);
|
|
IMGUI_API void *MemAlloc(size_t size);
|
|
IMGUI_API void MemFree(void *ptr);
|
|
|
|
} // namespace ImGui
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Flags & Enumerations
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::Begin()
|
|
// (Those are per-window flags. There are shared flags in ImGuiIO: io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges and io.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly)
|
|
enum ImGuiWindowFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar = 1 << 0, // Disable title-bar
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize = 1 << 1, // Disable user resizing with the lower-right grip
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove = 1 << 2, // Disable user moving the window
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar = 1 << 3, // Disable scrollbars (window can still scroll with mouse or programmatically)
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse = 1 << 4, // Disable user vertically scrolling with mouse wheel. On child window, mouse wheel will be forwarded to the
|
|
// parent unless NoScrollbar is also set.
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse =
|
|
1 << 5, // Disable user collapsing window by double-clicking on it. Also referred to as Window Menu Button (e.g. within a docking node).
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize = 1 << 6, // Resize every window to its content every frame
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground =
|
|
1 << 7, // Disable drawing background color (WindowBg, etc.) and outside border. Similar as using SetNextWindowBgAlpha(0.0f).
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings = 1 << 8, // Never load/save settings in .ini file
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs = 1 << 9, // Disable catching mouse, hovering test with pass through.
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar = 1 << 10, // Has a menu-bar
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar =
|
|
1 << 11, // Allow horizontal scrollbar to appear (off by default). You may use SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(width,0.0f)); prior to calling Begin() to
|
|
// specify width. Read code in imgui_demo in the "Horizontal Scrolling" section.
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing = 1 << 12, // Disable taking focus when transitioning from hidden to visible state
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus =
|
|
1 << 13, // Disable bringing window to front when taking focus (e.g. clicking on it or programmatically giving it focus)
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar = 1 << 14, // Always show vertical scrollbar (even if ContentSize.y < Size.y)
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar = 1 << 15, // Always show horizontal scrollbar (even if ContentSize.x < Size.x)
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding =
|
|
1 << 16, // Ensure child windows without border uses style.WindowPadding (ignored by default for non-bordered child windows, because more convenient)
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs = 1 << 18, // No gamepad/keyboard navigation within the window
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus = 1 << 19, // No focusing toward this window with gamepad/keyboard navigation (e.g. skipped by CTRL+TAB)
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument = 1 << 20, // Display a dot next to the title. When used in a tab/docking context, tab is selected when clicking the X +
|
|
// closure is not assumed (will wait for user to stop submitting the tab). Otherwise closure is assumed when
|
|
// pressing the X, so if you keep submitting the tab may reappear at end of tab bar.
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus,
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDecoration = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse,
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus,
|
|
|
|
// [Internal]
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened =
|
|
1 << 23, // [BETA] On child window: allow gamepad/keyboard navigation to cross over parent border to this child or between sibling child windows.
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow = 1 << 24, // Don't use! For internal use by BeginChild()
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip = 1 << 25, // Don't use! For internal use by BeginTooltip()
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup = 1 << 26, // Don't use! For internal use by BeginPopup()
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal = 1 << 27, // Don't use! For internal use by BeginPopupModal()
|
|
ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu = 1 << 28, // Don't use! For internal use by BeginMenu()
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::InputText()
|
|
// (Those are per-item flags. There are shared flags in ImGuiIO: io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink and io.ConfigInputTextEnterKeepActive)
|
|
enum ImGuiInputTextFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal = 1 << 0, // Allow 0123456789.+-*/
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal = 1 << 1, // Allow 0123456789ABCDEFabcdef
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase = 1 << 2, // Turn a..z into A..Z
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank = 1 << 3, // Filter out spaces, tabs
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll = 1 << 4, // Select entire text when first taking mouse focus
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue = 1 << 5, // Return 'true' when Enter is pressed (as opposed to every time the value was modified). Consider looking at
|
|
// the IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit() function.
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion = 1 << 6, // Callback on pressing TAB (for completion handling)
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory = 1 << 7, // Callback on pressing Up/Down arrows (for history handling)
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways = 1 << 8, // Callback on each iteration. User code may query cursor position, modify text buffer.
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter =
|
|
1 << 9, // Callback on character inputs to replace or discard them. Modify 'EventChar' to replace or discard, or return 1 in callback to discard.
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput = 1 << 10, // Pressing TAB input a '\t' character into the text field
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CtrlEnterForNewLine =
|
|
1 << 11, // In multi-line mode, unfocus with Enter, add new line with Ctrl+Enter (default is opposite: unfocus with Ctrl+Enter, add line with Enter).
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoHorizontalScroll = 1 << 12, // Disable following the cursor horizontally
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysOverwrite = 1 << 13, // Overwrite mode
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly = 1 << 14, // Read-only mode
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password = 1 << 15, // Password mode, display all characters as '*'
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoUndoRedo = 1 << 16, // Disable undo/redo. Note that input text owns the text data while active, if you want to provide your own
|
|
// undo/redo stack you need e.g. to call ClearActiveID().
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific = 1 << 17, // Allow 0123456789.+-*/eE (Scientific notation input)
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize =
|
|
1 << 18, // Callback on buffer capacity changes request (beyond 'buf_size' parameter value), allowing the string to grow. Notify when the string wants
|
|
// to be resized (for string types which hold a cache of their Size). You will be provided a new BufSize in the callback and NEED to honor it.
|
|
// (see misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h for an example of using this)
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit = 1 << 19, // Callback on any edit (note that InputText() already returns true on edit, the callback is useful mainly to
|
|
// manipulate the underlying buffer while focus is active)
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags_EscapeClearsAll =
|
|
1 << 20, // Escape key clears content if not empty, and deactivate otherwise (contrast to default behavior of Escape to revert)
|
|
|
|
// Obsolete names
|
|
// ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysInsertMode = ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysOverwrite // [renamed in 1.82] name was not matching behavior
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::TreeNodeEx(), ImGui::CollapsingHeader*()
|
|
enum ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected = 1 << 0, // Draw as selected
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Framed = 1 << 1, // Draw frame with background (e.g. for CollapsingHeader)
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowOverlap = 1 << 2, // Hit testing to allow subsequent widgets to overlap this one
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen = 1 << 3, // Don't do a TreePush() when open (e.g. for CollapsingHeader) = no extra indent nor pushing on ID stack
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoAutoOpenOnLog =
|
|
1 << 4, // Don't automatically and temporarily open node when Logging is active (by default logging will automatically open tree nodes)
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen = 1 << 5, // Default node to be open
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick = 1 << 6, // Need double-click to open node
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow = 1 << 7, // Only open when clicking on the arrow part. If ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick is also set, single-click
|
|
// arrow or double-click all box to open.
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf = 1 << 8, // No collapsing, no arrow (use as a convenience for leaf nodes).
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet = 1 << 9, // Display a bullet instead of arrow. IMPORTANT: node can still be marked open/close if you don't set the _Leaf flag!
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_FramePadding = 1 << 10, // Use FramePadding (even for an unframed text node) to vertically align text baseline to regular widget height.
|
|
// Equivalent to calling AlignTextToFramePadding().
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth =
|
|
1 << 11, // Extend hit box to the right-most edge, even if not framed. This is not the default in order to allow adding other items on the same line. In
|
|
// the future we may refactor the hit system to be front-to-back, allowing natural overlaps and then this can become the default.
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth = 1 << 12, // Extend hit box to the left-most and right-most edges (bypass the indented area).
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere =
|
|
1 << 13, // (WIP) Nav: left direction may move to this TreeNode() from any of its child (items submitted between TreeNode and TreePop)
|
|
// ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoScrollOnOpen = 1 << 14, // FIXME: TODO: Disable automatic scroll on TreePop() if node got just open and contents is not visible
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader = ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Framed | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoAutoOpenOnLog,
|
|
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
|
|
ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap = ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowOverlap, // Renamed in 1.89.7
|
|
#endif
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for OpenPopup*(), BeginPopupContext*(), IsPopupOpen() functions.
|
|
// - To be backward compatible with older API which took an 'int mouse_button = 1' argument, we need to treat
|
|
// small flags values as a mouse button index, so we encode the mouse button in the first few bits of the flags.
|
|
// It is therefore guaranteed to be legal to pass a mouse button index in ImGuiPopupFlags.
|
|
// - For the same reason, we exceptionally default the ImGuiPopupFlags argument of BeginPopupContextXXX functions to 1 instead of 0.
|
|
// IMPORTANT: because the default parameter is 1 (==ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight), if you rely on the default parameter
|
|
// and want to use another flag, you need to pass in the ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight flag explicitly.
|
|
// - Multiple buttons currently cannot be combined/or-ed in those functions (we could allow it later).
|
|
enum ImGuiPopupFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonLeft = 0, // For BeginPopupContext*(): open on Left Mouse release. Guaranteed to always be == 0 (same as ImGuiMouseButton_Left)
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight =
|
|
1, // For BeginPopupContext*(): open on Right Mouse release. Guaranteed to always be == 1 (same as ImGuiMouseButton_Right)
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonMiddle =
|
|
2, // For BeginPopupContext*(): open on Middle Mouse release. Guaranteed to always be == 2 (same as ImGuiMouseButton_Middle)
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonMask_ = 0x1F,
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonDefault_ = 1,
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverExistingPopup =
|
|
1 << 5, // For OpenPopup*(), BeginPopupContext*(): don't open if there's already a popup at the same level of the popup stack
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverItems = 1 << 6, // For BeginPopupContextWindow(): don't return true when hovering items, only when hovering empty space
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId = 1 << 7, // For IsPopupOpen(): ignore the ImGuiID parameter and test for any popup.
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel = 1 << 8, // For IsPopupOpen(): search/test at any level of the popup stack (default test in the current level)
|
|
ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopup = ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId | ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel,
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::Selectable()
|
|
enum ImGuiSelectableFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiSelectableFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups = 1 << 0, // Clicking this doesn't close parent popup window
|
|
ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns = 1 << 1, // Selectable frame can span all columns (text will still fit in current column)
|
|
ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick = 1 << 2, // Generate press events on double clicks too
|
|
ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled = 1 << 3, // Cannot be selected, display grayed out text
|
|
ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowOverlap = 1 << 4, // (WIP) Hit testing to allow subsequent widgets to overlap this one
|
|
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
|
|
ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowItemOverlap = ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowOverlap, // Renamed in 1.89.7
|
|
#endif
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::BeginCombo()
|
|
enum ImGuiComboFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiComboFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft = 1 << 0, // Align the popup toward the left by default
|
|
ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall = 1 << 1, // Max ~4 items visible. Tip: If you want your combo popup to be a specific size you can use
|
|
// SetNextWindowSizeConstraints() prior to calling BeginCombo()
|
|
ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular = 1 << 2, // Max ~8 items visible (default)
|
|
ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLarge = 1 << 3, // Max ~20 items visible
|
|
ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLargest = 1 << 4, // As many fitting items as possible
|
|
ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton = 1 << 5, // Display on the preview box without the square arrow button
|
|
ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview = 1 << 6, // Display only a square arrow button
|
|
ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_ = ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLarge | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLargest,
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::BeginTabBar()
|
|
enum ImGuiTabBarFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable = 1 << 0, // Allow manually dragging tabs to re-order them + New tabs are appended at the end of list
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs = 1 << 1, // Automatically select new tabs when they appear
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton = 1 << 2, // Disable buttons to open the tab list popup
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton =
|
|
1 << 3, // Disable behavior of closing tabs (that are submitted with p_open != NULL) with middle mouse button. You can still repro this behavior on
|
|
// user's side with if (IsItemHovered() && IsMouseClicked(2)) *p_open = false.
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTabListScrollingButtons = 1 << 4, // Disable scrolling buttons (apply when fitting policy is ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll)
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTooltip = 1 << 5, // Disable tooltips when hovering a tab
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown = 1 << 6, // Resize tabs when they don't fit
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll = 1 << 7, // Add scroll buttons when tabs don't fit
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_ = ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown | ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll,
|
|
ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyDefault_ = ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown,
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::BeginTabItem()
|
|
enum ImGuiTabItemFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument =
|
|
1 << 0, // Display a dot next to the title + tab is selected when clicking the X + closure is not assumed (will wait for user to stop submitting the
|
|
// tab). Otherwise closure is assumed when pressing the X, so if you keep submitting the tab may reappear at end of tab bar.
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags_SetSelected = 1 << 1, // Trigger flag to programmatically make the tab selected when calling BeginTabItem()
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton = 1
|
|
<< 2, // Disable behavior of closing tabs (that are submitted with p_open != NULL) with middle mouse button. You can still repro this behavior on user's
|
|
// side with if (IsItemHovered() && IsMouseClicked(2)) *p_open = false.
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoPushId = 1 << 3, // Don't call PushID(tab->ID)/PopID() on BeginTabItem()/EndTabItem()
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoTooltip = 1 << 4, // Disable tooltip for the given tab
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoReorder = 1 << 5, // Disable reordering this tab or having another tab cross over this tab
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading = 1 << 6, // Enforce the tab position to the left of the tab bar (after the tab list popup button)
|
|
ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing = 1 << 7, // Enforce the tab position to the right of the tab bar (before the scrolling buttons)
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::BeginTable()
|
|
// - Important! Sizing policies have complex and subtle side effects, much more so than you would expect.
|
|
// Read comments/demos carefully + experiment with live demos to get acquainted with them.
|
|
// - The DEFAULT sizing policies are:
|
|
// - Default to ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit if ScrollX is on, or if host window has ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize.
|
|
// - Default to ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame if ScrollX is off.
|
|
// - When ScrollX is off:
|
|
// - Table defaults to ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame -> all Columns defaults to ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch with same weight.
|
|
// - Columns sizing policy allowed: Stretch (default), Fixed/Auto.
|
|
// - Fixed Columns (if any) will generally obtain their requested width (unless the table cannot fit them all).
|
|
// - Stretch Columns will share the remaining width according to their respective weight.
|
|
// - Mixed Fixed/Stretch columns is possible but has various side-effects on resizing behaviors.
|
|
// The typical use of mixing sizing policies is: any number of LEADING Fixed columns, followed by one or two TRAILING Stretch columns.
|
|
// (this is because the visible order of columns have subtle but necessary effects on how they react to manual resizing).
|
|
// - When ScrollX is on:
|
|
// - Table defaults to ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit -> all Columns defaults to ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed
|
|
// - Columns sizing policy allowed: Fixed/Auto mostly.
|
|
// - Fixed Columns can be enlarged as needed. Table will show a horizontal scrollbar if needed.
|
|
// - When using auto-resizing (non-resizable) fixed columns, querying the content width to use item right-alignment e.g. SetNextItemWidth(-FLT_MIN) doesn't
|
|
// make sense, would create a feedback loop.
|
|
// - Using Stretch columns OFTEN DOES NOT MAKE SENSE if ScrollX is on, UNLESS you have specified a value for 'inner_width' in BeginTable().
|
|
// If you specify a value for 'inner_width' then effectively the scrolling space is known and Stretch or mixed Fixed/Stretch columns become meaningful
|
|
// again.
|
|
// - Read on documentation at the top of imgui_tables.cpp for details.
|
|
enum ImGuiTableFlags_ {
|
|
// Features
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable = 1 << 0, // Enable resizing columns.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable = 1 << 1, // Enable reordering columns in header row (need calling TableSetupColumn() + TableHeadersRow() to display headers)
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable = 1 << 2, // Enable hiding/disabling columns in context menu.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable =
|
|
1 << 3, // Enable sorting. Call TableGetSortSpecs() to obtain sort specs. Also see ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti and ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings = 1 << 4, // Disable persisting columns order, width and sort settings in the .ini file.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody = 1 << 5, // Right-click on columns body/contents will display table context menu. By default it is available in
|
|
// TableHeadersRow(). Decorations
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg = 1 << 6, // Set each RowBg color with ImGuiCol_TableRowBg or ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt (equivalent of calling TableSetBgColor with
|
|
// ImGuiTableBgFlags_RowBg0 on each row manually)
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH = 1 << 7, // Draw horizontal borders between rows.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH = 1 << 8, // Draw horizontal borders at the top and bottom.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV = 1 << 9, // Draw vertical borders between columns.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV = 1 << 10, // Draw vertical borders on the left and right sides.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_BordersH = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH, // Draw horizontal borders.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV, // Draw vertical borders.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInner = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH, // Draw inner borders.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH, // Draw outer borders.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_Borders = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInner | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter, // Draw all borders.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody = 1 << 11, // [ALPHA] Disable vertical borders in columns Body (borders will always appear in Headers). -> May move to style
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize = 1 << 12, // [ALPHA] Disable vertical borders in columns Body until hovered for resize (borders will always
|
|
// appear in Headers). -> May move to style Sizing Policy (read above for defaults)
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit = 1 << 13, // Columns default to _WidthFixed or _WidthAuto (if resizable or not resizable), matching contents width.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame = 2 << 13, // Columns default to _WidthFixed or _WidthAuto (if resizable or not resizable), matching the maximum contents
|
|
// width of all columns. Implicitly enable ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp = 3 << 13, // Columns default to _WidthStretch with default weights proportional to each columns contents widths.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame = 4 << 13, // Columns default to _WidthStretch with default weights all equal, unless overridden by TableSetupColumn().
|
|
// Sizing Extra Options
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX = 1 << 16, // Make outer width auto-fit to columns, overriding outer_size.x value. Only available when ScrollX/ScrollY are
|
|
// disabled and Stretch columns are not used.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY = 1 << 17, // Make outer height stop exactly at outer_size.y (prevent auto-extending table past the limit). Only available
|
|
// when ScrollX/ScrollY are disabled. Data below the limit will be clipped and not visible.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible =
|
|
1 << 18, // Disable keeping column always minimally visible when ScrollX is off and table gets too small. Not recommended if columns are resizable.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_PreciseWidths =
|
|
1 << 19, // Disable distributing remainder width to stretched columns (width allocation on a 100-wide table with 3 columns: Without this flag: 33,33,34.
|
|
// With this flag: 33,33,33). With larger number of columns, resizing will appear to be less smooth. Clipping
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip = 1 << 20, // Disable clipping rectangle for every individual columns (reduce draw command count, items will be able to overflow into
|
|
// other columns). Generally incompatible with TableSetupScrollFreeze(). Padding
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_PadOuterX = 1 << 21, // Default if BordersOuterV is on. Enable outermost padding. Generally desirable if you have headers.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadOuterX = 1 << 22, // Default if BordersOuterV is off. Disable outermost padding.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadInnerX = 1 << 23, // Disable inner padding between columns (double inner padding if BordersOuterV is on, single inner padding if
|
|
// BordersOuterV is off). Scrolling
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX =
|
|
1 << 24, // Enable horizontal scrolling. Require 'outer_size' parameter of BeginTable() to specify the container size. Changes default sizing policy.
|
|
// Because this creates a child window, ScrollY is currently generally recommended when using ScrollX.
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY = 1 << 25, // Enable vertical scrolling. Require 'outer_size' parameter of BeginTable() to specify the container size.
|
|
// Sorting
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti =
|
|
1 << 26, // Hold shift when clicking headers to sort on multiple column. TableGetSortSpecs() may return specs where (SpecsCount > 1).
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate = 1 << 27, // Allow no sorting, disable default sorting. TableGetSortSpecs() may return specs where (SpecsCount == 0).
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] Combinations and masks
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_ =
|
|
ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame,
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::TableSetupColumn()
|
|
enum ImGuiTableColumnFlags_ {
|
|
// Input configuration flags
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_Disabled = 1 << 0, // Overriding/master disable flag: hide column, won't show in context menu (unlike calling TableSetColumnEnabled()
|
|
// which manipulates the user accessible state)
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide = 1 << 1, // Default as a hidden/disabled column.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort = 1 << 2, // Default as a sorting column.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch = 1 << 3, // Column will stretch. Preferable with horizontal scrolling disabled (default if table sizing policy is
|
|
// _SizingStretchSame or _SizingStretchProp).
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed = 1 << 4, // Column will not stretch. Preferable with horizontal scrolling enabled (default if table sizing policy is
|
|
// _SizingFixedFit and table is resizable).
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize = 1 << 5, // Disable manual resizing.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoReorder = 1 << 6, // Disable manual reordering this column, this will also prevent other columns from crossing over this column.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide = 1 << 7, // Disable ability to hide/disable this column.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoClip = 1 << 8, // Disable clipping for this column (all NoClip columns will render in a same draw command).
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort = 1 << 9, // Disable ability to sort on this field (even if ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable is set on the table).
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortAscending = 1 << 10, // Disable ability to sort in the ascending direction.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortDescending = 1 << 11, // Disable ability to sort in the descending direction.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderLabel =
|
|
1 << 12, // TableHeadersRow() will not submit label for this column. Convenient for some small columns. Name will still appear in context menu.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderWidth = 1 << 13, // Disable header text width contribution to automatic column width.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortAscending = 1 << 14, // Make the initial sort direction Ascending when first sorting on this column (default).
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending = 1 << 15, // Make the initial sort direction Descending when first sorting on this column.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentEnable = 1 << 16, // Use current Indent value when entering cell (default for column 0).
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentDisable =
|
|
1 << 17, // Ignore current Indent value when entering cell (default for columns > 0). Indentation changes _within_ the cell will still be honored.
|
|
|
|
// Output status flags, read-only via TableGetColumnFlags()
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled = 1 << 24, // Status: is enabled == not hidden by user/api (referred to as "Hide" in _DefaultHide and _NoHide) flags.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsVisible = 1 << 25, // Status: is visible == is enabled AND not clipped by scrolling.
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsSorted = 1 << 26, // Status: is currently part of the sort specs
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered = 1 << 27, // Status: is hovered by mouse
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] Combinations and masks
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthMask_ = ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed,
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentMask_ = ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentEnable | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentDisable,
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_StatusMask_ =
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsVisible | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsSorted | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered,
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoDirectResize_ =
|
|
1 << 30, // [Internal] Disable user resizing this column directly (it may however we resized indirectly from its left edge)
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::TableNextRow()
|
|
enum ImGuiTableRowFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiTableRowFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers =
|
|
1 << 0, // Identify header row (set default background color + width of its contents accounted differently for auto column width)
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Enum for ImGui::TableSetBgColor()
|
|
// Background colors are rendering in 3 layers:
|
|
// - Layer 0: draw with RowBg0 color if set, otherwise draw with ColumnBg0 if set.
|
|
// - Layer 1: draw with RowBg1 color if set, otherwise draw with ColumnBg1 if set.
|
|
// - Layer 2: draw with CellBg color if set.
|
|
// The purpose of the two row/columns layers is to let you decide if a background color change should override or blend with the existing color.
|
|
// When using ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg on the table, each row has the RowBg0 color automatically set for odd/even rows.
|
|
// If you set the color of RowBg0 target, your color will override the existing RowBg0 color.
|
|
// If you set the color of RowBg1 or ColumnBg1 target, your color will blend over the RowBg0 color.
|
|
enum ImGuiTableBgTarget_ {
|
|
ImGuiTableBgTarget_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg0 = 1, // Set row background color 0 (generally used for background, automatically set when ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg is used)
|
|
ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg1 = 2, // Set row background color 1 (generally used for selection marking)
|
|
ImGuiTableBgTarget_CellBg = 3, // Set cell background color (top-most color)
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::IsWindowFocused()
|
|
enum ImGuiFocusedFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiFocusedFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows = 1 << 0, // Return true if any children of the window is focused
|
|
ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow = 1 << 1, // Test from root window (top most parent of the current hierarchy)
|
|
ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow = 1 << 2, // Return true if any window is focused. Important: If you are trying to tell how to dispatch your low-level inputs,
|
|
// do NOT use this. Use 'io.WantCaptureMouse' instead! Please read the FAQ!
|
|
ImGuiFocusedFlags_NoPopupHierarchy =
|
|
1 << 3, // Do not consider popup hierarchy (do not treat popup emitter as parent of popup) (when used with _ChildWindows or _RootWindow)
|
|
// ImGuiFocusedFlags_DockHierarchy = 1 << 4, // Consider docking hierarchy (treat dockspace host as parent of docked window) (when used with
|
|
// _ChildWindows or _RootWindow)
|
|
ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootAndChildWindows = ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows,
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::IsItemHovered(), ImGui::IsWindowHovered()
|
|
// Note: if you are trying to check whether your mouse should be dispatched to Dear ImGui or to your app, you should use 'io.WantCaptureMouse' instead! Please
|
|
// read the FAQ! Note: windows with the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs flag are ignored by IsWindowHovered() calls.
|
|
enum ImGuiHoveredFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_None = 0, // Return true if directly over the item/window, not obstructed by another window, not obstructed by an active popup or modal
|
|
// blocking inputs under them.
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows = 1 << 0, // IsWindowHovered() only: Return true if any children of the window is hovered
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow = 1 << 1, // IsWindowHovered() only: Test from root window (top most parent of the current hierarchy)
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow = 1 << 2, // IsWindowHovered() only: Return true if any window is hovered
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoPopupHierarchy = 1 << 3, // IsWindowHovered() only: Do not consider popup hierarchy (do not treat popup emitter as parent of popup)
|
|
// (when used with _ChildWindows or _RootWindow)
|
|
// ImGuiHoveredFlags_DockHierarchy = 1 << 4, // IsWindowHovered() only: Consider docking hierarchy (treat dockspace host as parent of docked
|
|
// window) (when used with _ChildWindows or _RootWindow)
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup = 1 << 5, // Return true even if a popup window is normally blocking access to this item/window
|
|
// ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByModal = 1 << 6, // Return true even if a modal popup window is normally blocking access to this item/window.
|
|
// FIXME-TODO: Unavailable yet.
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem = 1
|
|
<< 7, // Return true even if an active item is blocking access to this item/window. Useful for Drag and Drop patterns.
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlappedByItem =
|
|
1 << 8, // IsItemHovered() only: Return true even if the item uses AllowOverlap mode and is overlapped by another hoverable item.
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlappedByWindow =
|
|
1 << 9, // IsItemHovered() only: Return true even if the position is obstructed or overlapped by another window.
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenDisabled = 1 << 10, // IsItemHovered() only: Return true even if the item is disabled
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoNavOverride = 1 << 11, // IsItemHovered() only: Disable using gamepad/keyboard navigation state when active, always query mouse
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped = ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlappedByItem | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlappedByWindow,
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_RectOnly =
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped,
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootAndChildWindows = ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows,
|
|
|
|
// Tooltips mode
|
|
// - typically used in IsItemHovered() + SetTooltip() sequence.
|
|
// - this is a shortcut to pull flags from 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipMouse' or 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipNav' where you can reconfigure desired behavior.
|
|
// e.g. 'TooltipHoveredFlagsForMouse' defaults to 'ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary | ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort'.
|
|
// - for frequently actioned or hovered items providing a tooltip, you want may to use ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip (stationary + delay) so the tooltip
|
|
// doesn't show too often.
|
|
// - for items which main purpose is to be hovered, or items with low affordance, or in less consistent apps, prefer no delay or shorter delay.
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip = 1 << 12, // Shortcut for standard flags when using IsItemHovered() + SetTooltip() sequence.
|
|
|
|
// (Advanced) Mouse Hovering delays.
|
|
// - generally you can use ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip to use application-standardized flags.
|
|
// - use those if you need specific overrides.
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary = 1 << 13, // Require mouse to be stationary for style.HoverStationaryDelay (~0.15 sec) _at least one time_. After this, can
|
|
// move on same item/window. Using the stationary test tends to reduces the need for a long delay.
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNone = 1 << 14, // IsItemHovered() only: Return true immediately (default). As this is the default you generally ignore this.
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort = 1 << 15, // IsItemHovered() only: Return true after style.HoverDelayShort elapsed (~0.15 sec) (shared between items) +
|
|
// requires mouse to be stationary for style.HoverStationaryDelay (once per item).
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNormal = 1 << 16, // IsItemHovered() only: Return true after style.HoverDelayNormal elapsed (~0.40 sec) (shared between items) +
|
|
// requires mouse to be stationary for style.HoverStationaryDelay (once per item).
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoSharedDelay = 1 << 17, // IsItemHovered() only: Disable shared delay system where moving from one item to the next keeps the previous
|
|
// timer for a short time (standard for tooltips with long delays)
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImGui::BeginDragDropSource(), ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload()
|
|
enum ImGuiDragDropFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_None = 0,
|
|
// BeginDragDropSource() flags
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoPreviewTooltip = 1 << 0, // Disable preview tooltip. By default, a successful call to BeginDragDropSource opens a tooltip so you
|
|
// can display a preview or description of the source contents. This flag disables this behavior.
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoDisableHover =
|
|
1 << 1, // By default, when dragging we clear data so that IsItemHovered() will return false, to avoid subsequent user code submitting tooltips. This
|
|
// flag disables this behavior so you can still call IsItemHovered() on the source item.
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoHoldToOpenOthers =
|
|
1 << 2, // Disable the behavior that allows to open tree nodes and collapsing header by holding over them while dragging a source item.
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAllowNullID =
|
|
1 << 3, // Allow items such as Text(), Image() that have no unique identifier to be used as drag source, by manufacturing a temporary identifier based
|
|
// on their window-relative position. This is extremely unusual within the dear imgui ecosystem and so we made it explicit.
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern = 1 << 4, // External source (from outside of dear imgui), won't attempt to read current item/window info. Will always
|
|
// return true. Only one Extern source can be active simultaneously.
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAutoExpirePayload =
|
|
1 << 5, // Automatically expire the payload if the source cease to be submitted (otherwise payloads are persisting while being dragged)
|
|
// AcceptDragDropPayload() flags
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery = 1 << 10, // AcceptDragDropPayload() will returns true even before the mouse button is released. You can then call
|
|
// IsDelivery() to test if the payload needs to be delivered.
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect = 1 << 11, // Do not draw the default highlight rectangle when hovering over target.
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoPreviewTooltip = 1 << 12, // Request hiding the BeginDragDropSource tooltip from the BeginDragDropTarget site.
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptPeekOnly =
|
|
ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery | ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect, // For peeking ahead and inspecting the payload before delivery.
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Standard Drag and Drop payload types. You can define you own payload types using short strings. Types starting with '_' are defined by Dear ImGui.
|
|
#define IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F "_COL3F" // float[3]: Standard type for colors, without alpha. User code may use this type.
|
|
#define IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F "_COL4F" // float[4]: Standard type for colors. User code may use this type.
|
|
|
|
// A primary data type
|
|
enum ImGuiDataType_ {
|
|
ImGuiDataType_S8, // signed char / char (with sensible compilers)
|
|
ImGuiDataType_U8, // unsigned char
|
|
ImGuiDataType_S16, // short
|
|
ImGuiDataType_U16, // unsigned short
|
|
ImGuiDataType_S32, // int
|
|
ImGuiDataType_U32, // unsigned int
|
|
ImGuiDataType_S64, // long long / __int64
|
|
ImGuiDataType_U64, // unsigned long long / unsigned __int64
|
|
ImGuiDataType_Float, // float
|
|
ImGuiDataType_Double, // double
|
|
ImGuiDataType_COUNT
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// A cardinal direction
|
|
enum ImGuiDir_ { ImGuiDir_None = -1, ImGuiDir_Left = 0, ImGuiDir_Right = 1, ImGuiDir_Up = 2, ImGuiDir_Down = 3, ImGuiDir_COUNT };
|
|
|
|
// A sorting direction
|
|
enum ImGuiSortDirection_ {
|
|
ImGuiSortDirection_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending = 1, // Ascending = 0->9, A->Z etc.
|
|
ImGuiSortDirection_Descending = 2 // Descending = 9->0, Z->A etc.
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// A key identifier (ImGuiKey_XXX or ImGuiMod_XXX value): can represent Keyboard, Mouse and Gamepad values.
|
|
// All our named keys are >= 512. Keys value 0 to 511 are left unused as legacy native/opaque key values (< 1.87).
|
|
// Since >= 1.89 we increased typing (went from int to enum), some legacy code may need a cast to ImGuiKey.
|
|
// Read details about the 1.87 and 1.89 transition : https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/4921
|
|
// Note that "Keys" related to physical keys and are not the same concept as input "Characters", the later are submitted via io.AddInputCharacter().
|
|
enum ImGuiKey : int {
|
|
// Keyboard
|
|
ImGuiKey_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Tab = 512, // == ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN
|
|
ImGuiKey_LeftArrow,
|
|
ImGuiKey_RightArrow,
|
|
ImGuiKey_UpArrow,
|
|
ImGuiKey_DownArrow,
|
|
ImGuiKey_PageUp,
|
|
ImGuiKey_PageDown,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Home,
|
|
ImGuiKey_End,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Insert,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Delete,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Backspace,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Space,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Enter,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Escape,
|
|
ImGuiKey_LeftCtrl,
|
|
ImGuiKey_LeftShift,
|
|
ImGuiKey_LeftAlt,
|
|
ImGuiKey_LeftSuper,
|
|
ImGuiKey_RightCtrl,
|
|
ImGuiKey_RightShift,
|
|
ImGuiKey_RightAlt,
|
|
ImGuiKey_RightSuper,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Menu,
|
|
ImGuiKey_0,
|
|
ImGuiKey_1,
|
|
ImGuiKey_2,
|
|
ImGuiKey_3,
|
|
ImGuiKey_4,
|
|
ImGuiKey_5,
|
|
ImGuiKey_6,
|
|
ImGuiKey_7,
|
|
ImGuiKey_8,
|
|
ImGuiKey_9,
|
|
ImGuiKey_A,
|
|
ImGuiKey_B,
|
|
ImGuiKey_C,
|
|
ImGuiKey_D,
|
|
ImGuiKey_E,
|
|
ImGuiKey_F,
|
|
ImGuiKey_G,
|
|
ImGuiKey_H,
|
|
ImGuiKey_I,
|
|
ImGuiKey_J,
|
|
ImGuiKey_K,
|
|
ImGuiKey_L,
|
|
ImGuiKey_M,
|
|
ImGuiKey_N,
|
|
ImGuiKey_O,
|
|
ImGuiKey_P,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Q,
|
|
ImGuiKey_R,
|
|
ImGuiKey_S,
|
|
ImGuiKey_T,
|
|
ImGuiKey_U,
|
|
ImGuiKey_V,
|
|
ImGuiKey_W,
|
|
ImGuiKey_X,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Y,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Z,
|
|
ImGuiKey_F1,
|
|
ImGuiKey_F2,
|
|
ImGuiKey_F3,
|
|
ImGuiKey_F4,
|
|
ImGuiKey_F5,
|
|
ImGuiKey_F6,
|
|
ImGuiKey_F7,
|
|
ImGuiKey_F8,
|
|
ImGuiKey_F9,
|
|
ImGuiKey_F10,
|
|
ImGuiKey_F11,
|
|
ImGuiKey_F12,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Apostrophe, // '
|
|
ImGuiKey_Comma, // ,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Minus, // -
|
|
ImGuiKey_Period, // .
|
|
ImGuiKey_Slash, // /
|
|
ImGuiKey_Semicolon, // ;
|
|
ImGuiKey_Equal, // =
|
|
ImGuiKey_LeftBracket, // [
|
|
ImGuiKey_Backslash, // \ (this text inhibit multiline comment caused by backslash)
|
|
ImGuiKey_RightBracket, // ]
|
|
ImGuiKey_GraveAccent, // `
|
|
ImGuiKey_CapsLock,
|
|
ImGuiKey_ScrollLock,
|
|
ImGuiKey_NumLock,
|
|
ImGuiKey_PrintScreen,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Pause,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Keypad0,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Keypad1,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Keypad2,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Keypad3,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Keypad4,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Keypad5,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Keypad6,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Keypad7,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Keypad8,
|
|
ImGuiKey_Keypad9,
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeypadDecimal,
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeypadDivide,
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeypadMultiply,
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeypadSubtract,
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeypadAdd,
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeypadEnter,
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeypadEqual,
|
|
|
|
// Gamepad (some of those are analog values, 0.0f to 1.0f) // NAVIGATION ACTION
|
|
// (download controller mapping PNG/PSD at http://dearimgui.com/controls_sheets)
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadStart, // Menu (Xbox) + (Switch) Start/Options (PS)
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadBack, // View (Xbox) - (Switch) Share (PS)
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceLeft, // X (Xbox) Y (Switch) Square (PS) // Tap: Toggle Menu. Hold: Windowing mode (Focus/Move/Resize windows)
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceRight, // B (Xbox) A (Switch) Circle (PS) // Cancel / Close / Exit
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceUp, // Y (Xbox) X (Switch) Triangle (PS) // Text Input / On-screen Keyboard
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceDown, // A (Xbox) B (Switch) Cross (PS) // Activate / Open / Toggle / Tweak
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadLeft, // D-pad Left // Move / Tweak / Resize Window (in Windowing mode)
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadRight, // D-pad Right // Move / Tweak / Resize Window (in Windowing mode)
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadUp, // D-pad Up // Move / Tweak / Resize Window (in Windowing mode)
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadDown, // D-pad Down // Move / Tweak / Resize Window (in Windowing mode)
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadL1, // L Bumper (Xbox) L (Switch) L1 (PS) // Tweak Slower / Focus Previous (in Windowing mode)
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadR1, // R Bumper (Xbox) R (Switch) R1 (PS) // Tweak Faster / Focus Next (in Windowing mode)
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadL2, // L Trig. (Xbox) ZL (Switch) L2 (PS) [Analog]
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadR2, // R Trig. (Xbox) ZR (Switch) R2 (PS) [Analog]
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadL3, // L Stick (Xbox) L3 (Switch) L3 (PS)
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadR3, // R Stick (Xbox) R3 (Switch) R3 (PS)
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickLeft, // [Analog] // Move Window (in Windowing mode)
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickRight, // [Analog] // Move Window (in Windowing mode)
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickUp, // [Analog] // Move Window (in Windowing mode)
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickDown, // [Analog] // Move Window (in Windowing mode)
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickLeft, // [Analog]
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickRight, // [Analog]
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickUp, // [Analog]
|
|
ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickDown, // [Analog]
|
|
|
|
// Aliases: Mouse Buttons (auto-submitted from AddMouseButtonEvent() calls)
|
|
// - This is mirroring the data also written to io.MouseDown[], io.MouseWheel, in a format allowing them to be accessed via standard key API.
|
|
ImGuiKey_MouseLeft,
|
|
ImGuiKey_MouseRight,
|
|
ImGuiKey_MouseMiddle,
|
|
ImGuiKey_MouseX1,
|
|
ImGuiKey_MouseX2,
|
|
ImGuiKey_MouseWheelX,
|
|
ImGuiKey_MouseWheelY,
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] Reserved for mod storage
|
|
ImGuiKey_ReservedForModCtrl,
|
|
ImGuiKey_ReservedForModShift,
|
|
ImGuiKey_ReservedForModAlt,
|
|
ImGuiKey_ReservedForModSuper,
|
|
ImGuiKey_COUNT,
|
|
|
|
// Keyboard Modifiers (explicitly submitted by backend via AddKeyEvent() calls)
|
|
// - This is mirroring the data also written to io.KeyCtrl, io.KeyShift, io.KeyAlt, io.KeySuper, in a format allowing
|
|
// them to be accessed via standard key API, allowing calls such as IsKeyPressed(), IsKeyReleased(), querying duration etc.
|
|
// - Code polling every key (e.g. an interface to detect a key press for input mapping) might want to ignore those
|
|
// and prefer using the real keys (e.g. ImGuiKey_LeftCtrl, ImGuiKey_RightCtrl instead of ImGuiMod_Ctrl).
|
|
// - In theory the value of keyboard modifiers should be roughly equivalent to a logical or of the equivalent left/right keys.
|
|
// In practice: it's complicated; mods are often provided from different sources. Keyboard layout, IME, sticky keys and
|
|
// backends tend to interfere and break that equivalence. The safer decision is to relay that ambiguity down to the end-user...
|
|
ImGuiMod_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiMod_Ctrl = 1 << 12, // Ctrl
|
|
ImGuiMod_Shift = 1 << 13, // Shift
|
|
ImGuiMod_Alt = 1 << 14, // Option/Menu
|
|
ImGuiMod_Super = 1 << 15, // Cmd/Super/Windows
|
|
ImGuiMod_Shortcut = 1 << 11, // Alias for Ctrl (non-macOS) _or_ Super (macOS).
|
|
ImGuiMod_Mask_ = 0xF800, // 5-bits
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] Prior to 1.87 we required user to fill io.KeysDown[512] using their own native index + the io.KeyMap[] array.
|
|
// We are ditching this method but keeping a legacy path for user code doing e.g. IsKeyPressed(MY_NATIVE_KEY_CODE)
|
|
// If you need to iterate all keys (for e.g. an input mapper) you may use ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN..ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END.
|
|
ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN = 512,
|
|
ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END = ImGuiKey_COUNT,
|
|
ImGuiKey_NamedKey_COUNT = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END - ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN,
|
|
#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeysData_SIZE = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_COUNT, // Size of KeysData[]: only hold named keys
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN, // Accesses to io.KeysData[] must use (key - ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET) index.
|
|
#else
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeysData_SIZE = ImGuiKey_COUNT, // Size of KeysData[]: hold legacy 0..512 keycodes + named keys
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET = 0, // Accesses to io.KeysData[] must use (key - ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET) index.
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
|
|
ImGuiKey_ModCtrl = ImGuiMod_Ctrl,
|
|
ImGuiKey_ModShift = ImGuiMod_Shift,
|
|
ImGuiKey_ModAlt = ImGuiMod_Alt,
|
|
ImGuiKey_ModSuper = ImGuiMod_Super, // Renamed in 1.89
|
|
ImGuiKey_KeyPadEnter = ImGuiKey_KeypadEnter, // Renamed in 1.87
|
|
#endif
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
|
|
// OBSOLETED in 1.88 (from July 2022): ImGuiNavInput and io.NavInputs[].
|
|
// Official backends between 1.60 and 1.86: will keep working and feed gamepad inputs as long as IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO is not set.
|
|
// Custom backends: feed gamepad inputs via io.AddKeyEvent() and ImGuiKey_GamepadXXX enums.
|
|
enum ImGuiNavInput {
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_Activate,
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_Cancel,
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_Input,
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_Menu,
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_DpadLeft,
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_DpadRight,
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_DpadUp,
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_DpadDown,
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_LStickLeft,
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_LStickRight,
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_LStickUp,
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_LStickDown,
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_FocusPrev,
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_FocusNext,
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow,
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_TweakFast,
|
|
ImGuiNavInput_COUNT,
|
|
};
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Configuration flags stored in io.ConfigFlags. Set by user/application.
|
|
enum ImGuiConfigFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard = 1 << 0, // Master keyboard navigation enable flag. Enable full Tabbing + directional arrows + space/enter to activate.
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad = 1 << 1, // Master gamepad navigation enable flag. Backend also needs to set ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad.
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos =
|
|
1 << 2, // Instruct navigation to move the mouse cursor. May be useful on TV/console systems where moving a virtual mouse is awkward. Will update
|
|
// io.MousePos and set io.WantSetMousePos=true. If enabled you MUST honor io.WantSetMousePos requests in your backend, otherwise ImGui will
|
|
// react as if the mouse is jumping around back and forth.
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_NavNoCaptureKeyboard = 1 << 3, // Instruct navigation to not set the io.WantCaptureKeyboard flag when io.NavActive is set.
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse =
|
|
1 << 4, // Instruct imgui to clear mouse position/buttons in NewFrame(). This allows ignoring the mouse information set by the backend.
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange =
|
|
1 << 5, // Instruct backend to not alter mouse cursor shape and visibility. Use if the backend cursor changes are interfering with yours and you don't
|
|
// want to use SetMouseCursor() to change mouse cursor. You may want to honor requests from imgui by reading GetMouseCursor() yourself instead.
|
|
|
|
// User storage (to allow your backend/engine to communicate to code that may be shared between multiple projects. Those flags are NOT used by core Dear
|
|
// ImGui)
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_IsSRGB = 1 << 20, // Application is SRGB-aware.
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags_IsTouchScreen = 1 << 21, // Application is using a touch screen instead of a mouse.
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Backend capabilities flags stored in io.BackendFlags. Set by imgui_impl_xxx or custom backend.
|
|
enum ImGuiBackendFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiBackendFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad = 1 << 0, // Backend Platform supports gamepad and currently has one connected.
|
|
ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors = 1 << 1, // Backend Platform supports honoring GetMouseCursor() value to change the OS cursor shape.
|
|
ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos = 1 << 2, // Backend Platform supports io.WantSetMousePos requests to reposition the OS mouse position (only used if
|
|
// ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos is set).
|
|
ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset =
|
|
1 << 3, // Backend Renderer supports ImDrawCmd::VtxOffset. This enables output of large meshes (64K+ vertices) while still using 16-bit indices.
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Enumeration for PushStyleColor() / PopStyleColor()
|
|
enum ImGuiCol_ {
|
|
ImGuiCol_Text,
|
|
ImGuiCol_TextDisabled,
|
|
ImGuiCol_WindowBg, // Background of normal windows
|
|
ImGuiCol_ChildBg, // Background of child windows
|
|
ImGuiCol_PopupBg, // Background of popups, menus, tooltips windows
|
|
ImGuiCol_Border,
|
|
ImGuiCol_BorderShadow,
|
|
ImGuiCol_FrameBg, // Background of checkbox, radio button, plot, slider, text input
|
|
ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered,
|
|
ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_TitleBg,
|
|
ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed,
|
|
ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg,
|
|
ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg,
|
|
ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab,
|
|
ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered,
|
|
ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_CheckMark,
|
|
ImGuiCol_SliderGrab,
|
|
ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_Button,
|
|
ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered,
|
|
ImGuiCol_ButtonActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_Header, // Header* colors are used for CollapsingHeader, TreeNode, Selectable, MenuItem
|
|
ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered,
|
|
ImGuiCol_HeaderActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_Separator,
|
|
ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered,
|
|
ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip, // Resize grip in lower-right and lower-left corners of windows.
|
|
ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered,
|
|
ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_Tab, // TabItem in a TabBar
|
|
ImGuiCol_TabHovered,
|
|
ImGuiCol_TabActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused,
|
|
ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive,
|
|
ImGuiCol_PlotLines,
|
|
ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered,
|
|
ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram,
|
|
ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered,
|
|
ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg, // Table header background
|
|
ImGuiCol_TableBorderStrong, // Table outer and header borders (prefer using Alpha=1.0 here)
|
|
ImGuiCol_TableBorderLight, // Table inner borders (prefer using Alpha=1.0 here)
|
|
ImGuiCol_TableRowBg, // Table row background (even rows)
|
|
ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt, // Table row background (odd rows)
|
|
ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg,
|
|
ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget, // Rectangle highlighting a drop target
|
|
ImGuiCol_NavHighlight, // Gamepad/keyboard: current highlighted item
|
|
ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight, // Highlight window when using CTRL+TAB
|
|
ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg, // Darken/colorize entire screen behind the CTRL+TAB window list, when active
|
|
ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg, // Darken/colorize entire screen behind a modal window, when one is active
|
|
ImGuiCol_COUNT
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Enumeration for PushStyleVar() / PopStyleVar() to temporarily modify the ImGuiStyle structure.
|
|
// - The enum only refers to fields of ImGuiStyle which makes sense to be pushed/popped inside UI code.
|
|
// During initialization or between frames, feel free to just poke into ImGuiStyle directly.
|
|
// - Tip: Use your programming IDE navigation facilities on the names in the _second column_ below to find the actual members and their description.
|
|
// In Visual Studio IDE: CTRL+comma ("Edit.GoToAll") can follow symbols in comments, whereas CTRL+F12 ("Edit.GoToImplementation") cannot.
|
|
// With Visual Assist installed: ALT+G ("VAssistX.GoToImplementation") can also follow symbols in comments.
|
|
// - When changing this enum, you need to update the associated internal table GStyleVarInfo[] accordingly. This is where we link enum values to members
|
|
// offset/type.
|
|
enum ImGuiStyleVar_ {
|
|
// Enum name --------------------- // Member in ImGuiStyle structure (see ImGuiStyle for descriptions)
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha, // float Alpha
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_DisabledAlpha, // float DisabledAlpha
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, // ImVec2 WindowPadding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding, // float WindowRounding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_WindowBorderSize, // float WindowBorderSize
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_WindowMinSize, // ImVec2 WindowMinSize
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_WindowTitleAlign, // ImVec2 WindowTitleAlign
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, // float ChildRounding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize, // float ChildBorderSize
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_PopupRounding, // float PopupRounding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_PopupBorderSize, // float PopupBorderSize
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, // ImVec2 FramePadding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_FrameRounding, // float FrameRounding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_FrameBorderSize, // float FrameBorderSize
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, // ImVec2 ItemSpacing
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_ItemInnerSpacing, // ImVec2 ItemInnerSpacing
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_IndentSpacing, // float IndentSpacing
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_CellPadding, // ImVec2 CellPadding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarSize, // float ScrollbarSize
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarRounding, // float ScrollbarRounding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_GrabMinSize, // float GrabMinSize
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_GrabRounding, // float GrabRounding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_TabRounding, // float TabRounding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_ButtonTextAlign, // ImVec2 ButtonTextAlign
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_SelectableTextAlign, // ImVec2 SelectableTextAlign
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_SeparatorTextBorderSize, // float SeparatorTextBorderSize
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_SeparatorTextAlign, // ImVec2 SeparatorTextAlign
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_SeparatorTextPadding, // ImVec2 SeparatorTextPadding
|
|
ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for InvisibleButton() [extended in imgui_internal.h]
|
|
enum ImGuiButtonFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiButtonFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft = 1 << 0, // React on left mouse button (default)
|
|
ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight = 1 << 1, // React on right mouse button
|
|
ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMiddle = 1 << 2, // React on center mouse button
|
|
|
|
// [Internal]
|
|
ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMask_ = ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft | ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight | ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMiddle,
|
|
ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonDefault_ = ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft,
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ColorEdit3() / ColorEdit4() / ColorPicker3() / ColorPicker4() / ColorButton()
|
|
enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha =
|
|
1 << 1, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: ignore Alpha component (will only read 3 components from the input pointer).
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker = 1 << 2, // // ColorEdit: disable picker when clicking on color square.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions = 1 << 3, // // ColorEdit: disable toggling options menu when right-clicking on inputs/small preview.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview =
|
|
1 << 4, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: disable color square preview next to the inputs. (e.g. to show only the inputs)
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs =
|
|
1 << 5, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: disable inputs sliders/text widgets (e.g. to show only the small preview color square).
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip = 1 << 6, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: disable tooltip when hovering the preview.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel =
|
|
1 << 7, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: disable display of inline text label (the label is still forwarded to the tooltip and picker).
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview =
|
|
1 << 8, // // ColorPicker: disable bigger color preview on right side of the picker, use small color square preview instead.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop = 1 << 9, // // ColorEdit: disable drag and drop target. ColorButton: disable drag and drop source.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoBorder = 1 << 10, // // ColorButton: disable border (which is enforced by default)
|
|
|
|
// User Options (right-click on widget to change some of them).
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar = 1 << 16, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: show vertical alpha bar/gradient in picker.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview =
|
|
1 << 17, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: display preview as a transparent color over a checkerboard, instead of opaque.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf =
|
|
1 << 18, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: display half opaque / half checkerboard, instead of opaque.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR = 1 << 19, // // (WIP) ColorEdit: Currently only disable 0.0f..1.0f limits in RGBA edition (note: you probably want to
|
|
// use ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float flag as well).
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB =
|
|
1 << 20, // [Display] // ColorEdit: override _display_ type among RGB/HSV/Hex. ColorPicker: select any combination using one or more of RGB/HSV/Hex.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV = 1 << 21, // [Display] // "
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex = 1 << 22, // [Display] // "
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8 = 1 << 23, // [DataType] // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: _display_ values formatted as 0..255.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float = 1 << 24, // [DataType] // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: _display_ values formatted as 0.0f..1.0f floats instead of
|
|
// 0..255 integers. No round-trip of value via integers.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar = 1 << 25, // [Picker] // ColorPicker: bar for Hue, rectangle for Sat/Value.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel = 1 << 26, // [Picker] // ColorPicker: wheel for Hue, triangle for Sat/Value.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB = 1 << 27, // [Input] // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: input and output data in RGB format.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV = 1 << 28, // [Input] // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: input and output data in HSV format.
|
|
|
|
// Defaults Options. You can set application defaults using SetColorEditOptions(). The intent is that you probably don't want to
|
|
// override them in most of your calls. Let the user choose via the option menu and/or call SetColorEditOptions() once during startup.
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_ =
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8 | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar,
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] Masks
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_ = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex,
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_ = ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8 | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float,
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_ = ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar,
|
|
ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ = ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV,
|
|
|
|
// Obsolete names
|
|
// ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB, ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV, ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX =
|
|
// ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex // [renamed in 1.69]
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for DragFloat(), DragInt(), SliderFloat(), SliderInt() etc.
|
|
// We use the same sets of flags for DragXXX() and SliderXXX() functions as the features are the same and it makes it easier to swap them.
|
|
// (Those are per-item flags. There are shared flags in ImGuiIO: io.ConfigDragClickToInputText)
|
|
enum ImGuiSliderFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp =
|
|
1 << 4, // Clamp value to min/max bounds when input manually with CTRL+Click. By default CTRL+Click allows going out of bounds.
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic = 1 << 5, // Make the widget logarithmic (linear otherwise). Consider using ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat with this if using
|
|
// a format-string with small amount of digits.
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat =
|
|
1 << 6, // Disable rounding underlying value to match precision of the display format string (e.g. %.3f values are rounded to those 3 digits)
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput = 1 << 7, // Disable CTRL+Click or Enter key allowing to input text directly into the widget
|
|
ImGuiSliderFlags_InvalidMask_ = 0x7000000F, // [Internal] We treat using those bits as being potentially a 'float power' argument from the previous API that
|
|
// has got miscast to this enum, and will trigger an assert if needed.
|
|
|
|
// Obsolete names
|
|
// ImGuiSliderFlags_ClampOnInput = ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp, // [renamed in 1.79]
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Identify a mouse button.
|
|
// Those values are guaranteed to be stable and we frequently use 0/1 directly. Named enums provided for convenience.
|
|
enum ImGuiMouseButton_ { ImGuiMouseButton_Left = 0, ImGuiMouseButton_Right = 1, ImGuiMouseButton_Middle = 2, ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT = 5 };
|
|
|
|
// Enumeration for GetMouseCursor()
|
|
// User code may request backend to display given cursor by calling SetMouseCursor(), which is why we have some cursors that are marked unused here
|
|
enum ImGuiMouseCursor_ {
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_None = -1,
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_Arrow = 0,
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_TextInput, // When hovering over InputText, etc.
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeAll, // (Unused by Dear ImGui functions)
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS, // When hovering over a horizontal border
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW, // When hovering over a vertical border or a column
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNESW, // When hovering over the bottom-left corner of a window
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNWSE, // When hovering over the bottom-right corner of a window
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand, // (Unused by Dear ImGui functions. Use for e.g. hyperlinks)
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_NotAllowed, // When hovering something with disallowed interaction. Usually a crossed circle.
|
|
ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Enumeration for AddMouseSourceEvent() actual source of Mouse Input data.
|
|
// Historically we use "Mouse" terminology everywhere to indicate pointer data, e.g. MousePos, IsMousePressed(), io.AddMousePosEvent()
|
|
// But that "Mouse" data can come from different source which occasionally may be useful for application to know about.
|
|
// You can submit a change of pointer type using io.AddMouseSourceEvent().
|
|
enum ImGuiMouseSource : int {
|
|
ImGuiMouseSource_Mouse = 0, // Input is coming from an actual mouse.
|
|
ImGuiMouseSource_TouchScreen, // Input is coming from a touch screen (no hovering prior to initial press, less precise initial press aiming, dual-axis
|
|
// wheeling possible).
|
|
ImGuiMouseSource_Pen, // Input is coming from a pressure/magnetic pen (often used in conjunction with high-sampling rates).
|
|
ImGuiMouseSource_COUNT
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Enumeration for ImGui::SetWindow***(), SetNextWindow***(), SetNextItem***() functions
|
|
// Represent a condition.
|
|
// Important: Treat as a regular enum! Do NOT combine multiple values using binary operators! All the functions above treat 0 as a shortcut to ImGuiCond_Always.
|
|
enum ImGuiCond_ {
|
|
ImGuiCond_None = 0, // No condition (always set the variable), same as _Always
|
|
ImGuiCond_Always = 1 << 0, // No condition (always set the variable), same as _None
|
|
ImGuiCond_Once = 1 << 1, // Set the variable once per runtime session (only the first call will succeed)
|
|
ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver = 1 << 2, // Set the variable if the object/window has no persistently saved data (no entry in .ini file)
|
|
ImGuiCond_Appearing = 1 << 3, // Set the variable if the object/window is appearing after being hidden/inactive (or the first time)
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Helpers: Memory allocations macros, ImVector<>
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// IM_MALLOC(), IM_FREE(), IM_NEW(), IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(), IM_DELETE()
|
|
// We call C++ constructor on own allocated memory via the placement "new(ptr) Type()" syntax.
|
|
// Defining a custom placement new() with a custom parameter allows us to bypass including <new> which on some platforms complains when user has disabled
|
|
// exceptions.
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
struct ImNewWrapper {
|
|
};
|
|
inline void *operator new(size_t, ImNewWrapper, void *ptr)
|
|
{
|
|
return ptr;
|
|
}
|
|
inline void operator delete(void *, ImNewWrapper, void *)
|
|
{
|
|
} // This is only required so we can use the symmetrical new()
|
|
#define IM_ALLOC(_SIZE) ImGui::MemAlloc(_SIZE)
|
|
#define IM_FREE(_PTR) ImGui::MemFree(_PTR)
|
|
#define IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(_PTR) new (ImNewWrapper(), _PTR)
|
|
#define IM_NEW(_TYPE) new (ImNewWrapper(), ImGui::MemAlloc(sizeof(_TYPE))) _TYPE
|
|
template<typename T>
|
|
void IM_DELETE(T *p)
|
|
{
|
|
if (p) {
|
|
p->~T();
|
|
ImGui::MemFree(p);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// ImVector<>
|
|
// Lightweight std::vector<>-like class to avoid dragging dependencies (also, some implementations of STL with debug enabled are absurdly slow, we bypass it so
|
|
// our code runs fast in debug).
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// - You generally do NOT need to care or use this ever. But we need to make it available in imgui.h because some of our public structures are relying on it.
|
|
// - We use std-like naming convention here, which is a little unusual for this codebase.
|
|
// - Important: clear() frees memory, resize(0) keep the allocated buffer. We use resize(0) a lot to intentionally recycle allocated buffers across frames and
|
|
// amortize our costs.
|
|
// - Important: our implementation does NOT call C++ constructors/destructors, we treat everything as raw data! This is intentional but be extra mindful of
|
|
// that,
|
|
// Do NOT use this class as a std::vector replacement in your own code! Many of the structures used by dear imgui can be safely initialized by a zero-memset.
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF
|
|
template<typename T>
|
|
struct ImVector {
|
|
int Size;
|
|
int Capacity;
|
|
T *Data;
|
|
|
|
// Provide standard typedefs but we don't use them ourselves.
|
|
typedef T value_type;
|
|
typedef value_type *iterator;
|
|
typedef const value_type *const_iterator;
|
|
|
|
// Constructors, destructor
|
|
inline ImVector()
|
|
{
|
|
Size = Capacity = 0;
|
|
Data = NULL;
|
|
}
|
|
inline ImVector(const ImVector<T> &src)
|
|
{
|
|
Size = Capacity = 0;
|
|
Data = NULL;
|
|
operator=(src);
|
|
}
|
|
inline ImVector<T> &operator=(const ImVector<T> &src)
|
|
{
|
|
clear();
|
|
resize(src.Size);
|
|
if (src.Data)
|
|
memcpy(Data, src.Data, (size_t)Size * sizeof(T));
|
|
return *this;
|
|
}
|
|
inline ~ImVector()
|
|
{
|
|
if (Data)
|
|
IM_FREE(Data);
|
|
} // Important: does not destruct anything
|
|
|
|
inline void clear()
|
|
{
|
|
if (Data) {
|
|
Size = Capacity = 0;
|
|
IM_FREE(Data);
|
|
Data = NULL;
|
|
}
|
|
} // Important: does not destruct anything
|
|
inline void clear_delete()
|
|
{
|
|
for (int n = 0; n < Size; n++)
|
|
IM_DELETE(Data[n]);
|
|
clear();
|
|
} // Important: never called automatically! always explicit.
|
|
inline void clear_destruct()
|
|
{
|
|
for (int n = 0; n < Size; n++)
|
|
Data[n].~T();
|
|
clear();
|
|
} // Important: never called automatically! always explicit.
|
|
|
|
inline bool empty() const
|
|
{
|
|
return Size == 0;
|
|
}
|
|
inline int size() const
|
|
{
|
|
return Size;
|
|
}
|
|
inline int size_in_bytes() const
|
|
{
|
|
return Size * (int)sizeof(T);
|
|
}
|
|
inline int max_size() const
|
|
{
|
|
return 0x7FFFFFFF / (int)sizeof(T);
|
|
}
|
|
inline int capacity() const
|
|
{
|
|
return Capacity;
|
|
}
|
|
inline T &operator[](int i)
|
|
{
|
|
IM_ASSERT(i >= 0 && i < Size);
|
|
return Data[i];
|
|
}
|
|
inline const T &operator[](int i) const
|
|
{
|
|
IM_ASSERT(i >= 0 && i < Size);
|
|
return Data[i];
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
inline T *begin()
|
|
{
|
|
return Data;
|
|
}
|
|
inline const T *begin() const
|
|
{
|
|
return Data;
|
|
}
|
|
inline T *end()
|
|
{
|
|
return Data + Size;
|
|
}
|
|
inline const T *end() const
|
|
{
|
|
return Data + Size;
|
|
}
|
|
inline T &front()
|
|
{
|
|
IM_ASSERT(Size > 0);
|
|
return Data[0];
|
|
}
|
|
inline const T &front() const
|
|
{
|
|
IM_ASSERT(Size > 0);
|
|
return Data[0];
|
|
}
|
|
inline T &back()
|
|
{
|
|
IM_ASSERT(Size > 0);
|
|
return Data[Size - 1];
|
|
}
|
|
inline const T &back() const
|
|
{
|
|
IM_ASSERT(Size > 0);
|
|
return Data[Size - 1];
|
|
}
|
|
inline void swap(ImVector<T> &rhs)
|
|
{
|
|
int rhs_size = rhs.Size;
|
|
rhs.Size = Size;
|
|
Size = rhs_size;
|
|
int rhs_cap = rhs.Capacity;
|
|
rhs.Capacity = Capacity;
|
|
Capacity = rhs_cap;
|
|
T *rhs_data = rhs.Data;
|
|
rhs.Data = Data;
|
|
Data = rhs_data;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
inline int _grow_capacity(int sz) const
|
|
{
|
|
int new_capacity = Capacity ? (Capacity + Capacity / 2) : 8;
|
|
return new_capacity > sz ? new_capacity : sz;
|
|
}
|
|
inline void resize(int new_size)
|
|
{
|
|
if (new_size > Capacity)
|
|
reserve(_grow_capacity(new_size));
|
|
Size = new_size;
|
|
}
|
|
inline void resize(int new_size, const T &v)
|
|
{
|
|
if (new_size > Capacity)
|
|
reserve(_grow_capacity(new_size));
|
|
if (new_size > Size)
|
|
for (int n = Size; n < new_size; n++)
|
|
memcpy(&Data[n], &v, sizeof(v));
|
|
Size = new_size;
|
|
}
|
|
inline void shrink(int new_size)
|
|
{
|
|
IM_ASSERT(new_size <= Size);
|
|
Size = new_size;
|
|
} // Resize a vector to a smaller size, guaranteed not to cause a reallocation
|
|
inline void reserve(int new_capacity)
|
|
{
|
|
if (new_capacity <= Capacity)
|
|
return;
|
|
T *new_data = (T *)IM_ALLOC((size_t)new_capacity * sizeof(T));
|
|
if (Data) {
|
|
memcpy(new_data, Data, (size_t)Size * sizeof(T));
|
|
IM_FREE(Data);
|
|
}
|
|
Data = new_data;
|
|
Capacity = new_capacity;
|
|
}
|
|
inline void reserve_discard(int new_capacity)
|
|
{
|
|
if (new_capacity <= Capacity)
|
|
return;
|
|
if (Data)
|
|
IM_FREE(Data);
|
|
Data = (T *)IM_ALLOC((size_t)new_capacity * sizeof(T));
|
|
Capacity = new_capacity;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// NB: It is illegal to call push_back/push_front/insert with a reference pointing inside the ImVector data itself! e.g. v.push_back(v[10]) is forbidden.
|
|
inline void push_back(const T &v)
|
|
{
|
|
if (Size == Capacity)
|
|
reserve(_grow_capacity(Size + 1));
|
|
memcpy(&Data[Size], &v, sizeof(v));
|
|
Size++;
|
|
}
|
|
inline void pop_back()
|
|
{
|
|
IM_ASSERT(Size > 0);
|
|
Size--;
|
|
}
|
|
inline void push_front(const T &v)
|
|
{
|
|
if (Size == 0)
|
|
push_back(v);
|
|
else
|
|
insert(Data, v);
|
|
}
|
|
inline T *erase(const T *it)
|
|
{
|
|
IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data + Size);
|
|
const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data;
|
|
memmove(Data + off, Data + off + 1, ((size_t)Size - (size_t)off - 1) * sizeof(T));
|
|
Size--;
|
|
return Data + off;
|
|
}
|
|
inline T *erase(const T *it, const T *it_last)
|
|
{
|
|
IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data + Size && it_last >= it && it_last <= Data + Size);
|
|
const ptrdiff_t count = it_last - it;
|
|
const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data;
|
|
memmove(Data + off, Data + off + count, ((size_t)Size - (size_t)off - (size_t)count) * sizeof(T));
|
|
Size -= (int)count;
|
|
return Data + off;
|
|
}
|
|
inline T *erase_unsorted(const T *it)
|
|
{
|
|
IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data + Size);
|
|
const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data;
|
|
if (it < Data + Size - 1)
|
|
memcpy(Data + off, Data + Size - 1, sizeof(T));
|
|
Size--;
|
|
return Data + off;
|
|
}
|
|
inline T *insert(const T *it, const T &v)
|
|
{
|
|
IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it <= Data + Size);
|
|
const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data;
|
|
if (Size == Capacity)
|
|
reserve(_grow_capacity(Size + 1));
|
|
if (off < (int)Size)
|
|
memmove(Data + off + 1, Data + off, ((size_t)Size - (size_t)off) * sizeof(T));
|
|
memcpy(&Data[off], &v, sizeof(v));
|
|
Size++;
|
|
return Data + off;
|
|
}
|
|
inline bool contains(const T &v) const
|
|
{
|
|
const T *data = Data;
|
|
const T *data_end = Data + Size;
|
|
while (data < data_end)
|
|
if (*data++ == v)
|
|
return true;
|
|
return false;
|
|
}
|
|
inline T *find(const T &v)
|
|
{
|
|
T *data = Data;
|
|
const T *data_end = Data + Size;
|
|
while (data < data_end)
|
|
if (*data == v)
|
|
break;
|
|
else
|
|
++data;
|
|
return data;
|
|
}
|
|
inline const T *find(const T &v) const
|
|
{
|
|
const T *data = Data;
|
|
const T *data_end = Data + Size;
|
|
while (data < data_end)
|
|
if (*data == v)
|
|
break;
|
|
else
|
|
++data;
|
|
return data;
|
|
}
|
|
inline bool find_erase(const T &v)
|
|
{
|
|
const T *it = find(v);
|
|
if (it < Data + Size) {
|
|
erase(it);
|
|
return true;
|
|
}
|
|
return false;
|
|
}
|
|
inline bool find_erase_unsorted(const T &v)
|
|
{
|
|
const T *it = find(v);
|
|
if (it < Data + Size) {
|
|
erase_unsorted(it);
|
|
return true;
|
|
}
|
|
return false;
|
|
}
|
|
inline int index_from_ptr(const T *it) const
|
|
{
|
|
IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data + Size);
|
|
const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data;
|
|
return (int)off;
|
|
}
|
|
};
|
|
IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] ImGuiStyle
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// You may modify the ImGui::GetStyle() main instance during initialization and before NewFrame().
|
|
// During the frame, use ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_XXXX)/PopStyleVar() to alter the main style values,
|
|
// and ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_XXX)/PopStyleColor() for colors.
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
struct ImGuiStyle {
|
|
float Alpha; // Global alpha applies to everything in Dear ImGui.
|
|
float DisabledAlpha; // Additional alpha multiplier applied by BeginDisabled(). Multiply over current value of Alpha.
|
|
ImVec2 WindowPadding; // Padding within a window.
|
|
float WindowRounding; // Radius of window corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular windows. Large values tend to lead to variety of artifacts and
|
|
// are not recommended.
|
|
float WindowBorderSize; // Thickness of border around windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. (Other values are not well tested and more CPU/GPU costly).
|
|
ImVec2 WindowMinSize; // Minimum window size. This is a global setting. If you want to constrain individual windows, use SetNextWindowSizeConstraints().
|
|
ImVec2 WindowTitleAlign; // Alignment for title bar text. Defaults to (0.0f,0.5f) for left-aligned,vertically centered.
|
|
ImGuiDir WindowMenuButtonPosition; // Side of the collapsing/docking button in the title bar (None/Left/Right). Defaults to ImGuiDir_Left.
|
|
float ChildRounding; // Radius of child window corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular windows.
|
|
float
|
|
ChildBorderSize; // Thickness of border around child windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. (Other values are not well tested and more CPU/GPU costly).
|
|
float PopupRounding; // Radius of popup window corners rounding. (Note that tooltip windows use WindowRounding)
|
|
float PopupBorderSize; // Thickness of border around popup/tooltip windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. (Other values are not well tested and more
|
|
// CPU/GPU costly).
|
|
ImVec2 FramePadding; // Padding within a framed rectangle (used by most widgets).
|
|
float FrameRounding; // Radius of frame corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular frame (used by most widgets).
|
|
float FrameBorderSize; // Thickness of border around frames. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. (Other values are not well tested and more CPU/GPU costly).
|
|
ImVec2 ItemSpacing; // Horizontal and vertical spacing between widgets/lines.
|
|
ImVec2 ItemInnerSpacing; // Horizontal and vertical spacing between within elements of a composed widget (e.g. a slider and its label).
|
|
ImVec2 CellPadding; // Padding within a table cell. CellPadding.y may be altered between different rows.
|
|
ImVec2 TouchExtraPadding; // Expand reactive bounding box for touch-based system where touch position is not accurate enough. Unfortunately we don't sort
|
|
// widgets so priority on overlap will always be given to the first widget. So don't grow this too much!
|
|
float IndentSpacing; // Horizontal indentation when e.g. entering a tree node. Generally == (FontSize + FramePadding.x*2).
|
|
float ColumnsMinSpacing; // Minimum horizontal spacing between two columns. Preferably > (FramePadding.x + 1).
|
|
float ScrollbarSize; // Width of the vertical scrollbar, Height of the horizontal scrollbar.
|
|
float ScrollbarRounding; // Radius of grab corners for scrollbar.
|
|
float GrabMinSize; // Minimum width/height of a grab box for slider/scrollbar.
|
|
float GrabRounding; // Radius of grabs corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular slider grabs.
|
|
float LogSliderDeadzone; // The size in pixels of the dead-zone around zero on logarithmic sliders that cross zero.
|
|
float TabRounding; // Radius of upper corners of a tab. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular tabs.
|
|
float TabBorderSize; // Thickness of border around tabs.
|
|
float TabMinWidthForCloseButton; // Minimum width for close button to appear on an unselected tab when hovered. Set to 0.0f to always show when hovering,
|
|
// set to FLT_MAX to never show close button unless selected.
|
|
ImGuiDir ColorButtonPosition; // Side of the color button in the ColorEdit4 widget (left/right). Defaults to ImGuiDir_Right.
|
|
ImVec2 ButtonTextAlign; // Alignment of button text when button is larger than text. Defaults to (0.5f, 0.5f) (centered).
|
|
ImVec2 SelectableTextAlign; // Alignment of selectable text. Defaults to (0.0f, 0.0f) (top-left aligned). It's generally important to keep this left-aligned
|
|
// if you want to lay multiple items on a same line.
|
|
float SeparatorTextBorderSize; // Thickkness of border in SeparatorText()
|
|
ImVec2 SeparatorTextAlign; // Alignment of text within the separator. Defaults to (0.0f, 0.5f) (left aligned, center).
|
|
ImVec2 SeparatorTextPadding; // Horizontal offset of text from each edge of the separator + spacing on other axis. Generally small values. .y is recommended
|
|
// to be == FramePadding.y.
|
|
ImVec2 DisplayWindowPadding; // Window position are clamped to be visible within the display area or monitors by at least this amount. Only applies to
|
|
// regular windows.
|
|
ImVec2 DisplaySafeAreaPadding; // If you cannot see the edges of your screen (e.g. on a TV) increase the safe area padding. Apply to popups/tooltips as well
|
|
// regular windows. NB: Prefer configuring your TV sets correctly!
|
|
float MouseCursorScale; // Scale software rendered mouse cursor (when io.MouseDrawCursor is enabled). May be removed later.
|
|
bool AntiAliasedLines; // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders. Disable if you are really tight on CPU/GPU. Latched at the beginning of the frame (copied to
|
|
// ImDrawList).
|
|
bool AntiAliasedLinesUseTex; // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders using textures where possible. Require backend to render with bilinear filtering (NOT
|
|
// point/nearest filtering). Latched at the beginning of the frame (copied to ImDrawList).
|
|
bool AntiAliasedFill; // Enable anti-aliased edges around filled shapes (rounded rectangles, circles, etc.). Disable if you are really tight on CPU/GPU.
|
|
// Latched at the beginning of the frame (copied to ImDrawList).
|
|
float CurveTessellationTol; // Tessellation tolerance when using PathBezierCurveTo() without a specific number of segments. Decrease for highly tessellated
|
|
// curves (higher quality, more polygons), increase to reduce quality.
|
|
float CircleTessellationMaxError; // Maximum error (in pixels) allowed when using AddCircle()/AddCircleFilled() or drawing rounded corner rectangles with no
|
|
// explicit segment count specified. Decrease for higher quality but more geometry.
|
|
ImVec4 Colors[ImGuiCol_COUNT];
|
|
|
|
// Behaviors
|
|
// (It is possible to modify those fields mid-frame if specific behavior need it, unlike e.g. configuration fields in ImGuiIO)
|
|
float HoverStationaryDelay; // Delay for IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary). Time required to consider mouse stationary.
|
|
float HoverDelayShort; // Delay for IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort). Usually used along with HoverStationaryDelay.
|
|
float HoverDelayNormal; // Delay for IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNormal). "
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags HoverFlagsForTooltipMouse; // Default flags when using IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip) or BeginItemTooltip()/SetItemTooltip()
|
|
// while using mouse.
|
|
ImGuiHoveredFlags HoverFlagsForTooltipNav; // Default flags when using IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip) or BeginItemTooltip()/SetItemTooltip()
|
|
// while using keyboard/gamepad.
|
|
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiStyle();
|
|
IMGUI_API void ScaleAllSizes(float scale_factor);
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] ImGuiIO
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// Communicate most settings and inputs/outputs to Dear ImGui using this structure.
|
|
// Access via ImGui::GetIO(). Read 'Programmer guide' section in .cpp file for general usage.
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] Storage used by IsKeyDown(), IsKeyPressed() etc functions.
|
|
// If prior to 1.87 you used io.KeysDownDuration[] (which was marked as internal), you should use GetKeyData(key)->DownDuration and *NOT*
|
|
// io.KeysData[key]->DownDuration.
|
|
struct ImGuiKeyData {
|
|
bool Down; // True for if key is down
|
|
float DownDuration; // Duration the key has been down (<0.0f: not pressed, 0.0f: just pressed, >0.0f: time held)
|
|
float DownDurationPrev; // Last frame duration the key has been down
|
|
float AnalogValue; // 0.0f..1.0f for gamepad values
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
struct ImGuiIO {
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// Configuration // Default value
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
ImGuiConfigFlags ConfigFlags; // = 0 // See ImGuiConfigFlags_ enum. Set by user/application. Gamepad/keyboard navigation options, etc.
|
|
ImGuiBackendFlags BackendFlags; // = 0 // See ImGuiBackendFlags_ enum. Set by backend (imgui_impl_xxx files or custom backend) to communicate
|
|
// features supported by the backend.
|
|
ImVec2 DisplaySize; // <unset> // Main display size, in pixels (generally == GetMainViewport()->Size). May change every frame.
|
|
float DeltaTime; // = 1.0f/60.0f // Time elapsed since last frame, in seconds. May change every frame.
|
|
float IniSavingRate; // = 5.0f // Minimum time between saving positions/sizes to .ini file, in seconds.
|
|
const char *IniFilename; // = "imgui.ini" // Path to .ini file (important: default "imgui.ini" is relative to current working dir!). Set NULL to disable
|
|
// automatic .ini loading/saving or if you want to manually call LoadIniSettingsXXX() / SaveIniSettingsXXX() functions.
|
|
const char *LogFilename; // = "imgui_log.txt"// Path to .log file (default parameter to ImGui::LogToFile when no file is specified).
|
|
void *UserData; // = NULL // Store your own data.
|
|
|
|
ImFontAtlas *Fonts; // <auto> // Font atlas: load, rasterize and pack one or more fonts into a single texture.
|
|
float FontGlobalScale; // = 1.0f // Global scale all fonts
|
|
bool FontAllowUserScaling; // = false // Allow user scaling text of individual window with CTRL+Wheel.
|
|
ImFont *FontDefault; // = NULL // Font to use on NewFrame(). Use NULL to uses Fonts->Fonts[0].
|
|
ImVec2 DisplayFramebufferScale; // = (1, 1) // For retina display or other situations where window coordinates are different from framebuffer
|
|
// coordinates. This generally ends up in ImDrawData::FramebufferScale.
|
|
|
|
// Miscellaneous options
|
|
bool MouseDrawCursor; // = false // Request ImGui to draw a mouse cursor for you (if you are on a platform without a mouse cursor). Cannot be
|
|
// easily renamed to 'io.ConfigXXX' because this is frequently used by backend implementations.
|
|
bool ConfigMacOSXBehaviors; // = defined(__APPLE__) // OS X style: Text editing cursor movement using Alt instead of Ctrl, Shortcuts using Cmd/Super instead
|
|
// of Ctrl, Line/Text Start and End using Cmd+Arrows instead of Home/End, Double click selects by word instead of selecting
|
|
// whole text, Multi-selection in lists uses Cmd/Super instead of Ctrl.
|
|
bool ConfigInputTrickleEventQueue; // = true // Enable input queue trickling: some types of events submitted during the same frame (e.g. button
|
|
// down + up) will be spread over multiple frames, improving interactions with low framerates.
|
|
bool ConfigInputTextCursorBlink; // = true // Enable blinking cursor (optional as some users consider it to be distracting).
|
|
bool ConfigInputTextEnterKeepActive; // = false // [BETA] Pressing Enter will keep item active and select contents (single-line only).
|
|
bool ConfigDragClickToInputText; // = false // [BETA] Enable turning DragXXX widgets into text input with a simple mouse click-release (without
|
|
// moving). Not desirable on devices without a keyboard.
|
|
bool ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges; // = true // Enable resizing of windows from their edges and from the lower-left corner. This requires
|
|
// (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors) because it needs mouse cursor feedback. (This used to be a
|
|
// per-window ImGuiWindowFlags_ResizeFromAnySide flag)
|
|
bool ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly; // = false // Enable allowing to move windows only when clicking on their title bar. Does not apply to windows
|
|
// without a title bar.
|
|
float ConfigMemoryCompactTimer; // = 60.0f // Timer (in seconds) to free transient windows/tables memory buffers when unused. Set to -1.0f to
|
|
// disable.
|
|
|
|
// Inputs Behaviors
|
|
// (other variables, ones which are expected to be tweaked within UI code, are exposed in ImGuiStyle)
|
|
float MouseDoubleClickTime; // = 0.30f // Time for a double-click, in seconds.
|
|
float MouseDoubleClickMaxDist; // = 6.0f // Distance threshold to stay in to validate a double-click, in pixels.
|
|
float MouseDragThreshold; // = 6.0f // Distance threshold before considering we are dragging.
|
|
float KeyRepeatDelay; // = 0.275f // When holding a key/button, time before it starts repeating, in seconds (for buttons in Repeat mode, etc.).
|
|
float KeyRepeatRate; // = 0.050f // When holding a key/button, rate at which it repeats, in seconds.
|
|
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// Debug options
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Tools to test correct Begin/End and BeginChild/EndChild behaviors.
|
|
// Presently Begin()/End() and BeginChild()/EndChild() needs to ALWAYS be called in tandem, regardless of return value of BeginXXX()
|
|
// This is inconsistent with other BeginXXX functions and create confusion for many users.
|
|
// We expect to update the API eventually. In the meanwhile we provide tools to facilitate checking user-code behavior.
|
|
bool ConfigDebugBeginReturnValueOnce; // = false // First-time calls to Begin()/BeginChild() will return false. NEEDS TO BE SET AT APPLICATION BOOT
|
|
// TIME if you don't want to miss windows.
|
|
bool ConfigDebugBeginReturnValueLoop; // = false // Some calls to Begin()/BeginChild() will return false. Will cycle through window depths then
|
|
// repeat. Suggested use: add "io.ConfigDebugBeginReturnValue = io.KeyShift" in your main loop then occasionally press
|
|
// SHIFT. Windows should be flickering while running.
|
|
|
|
// Option to deactivate io.AddFocusEvent(false) handling. May facilitate interactions with a debugger when focus loss leads to clearing inputs data.
|
|
// Backends may have other side-effects on focus loss, so this will reduce side-effects but not necessary remove all of them.
|
|
// Consider using e.g. Win32's IsDebuggerPresent() as an additional filter (or see ImOsIsDebuggerPresent() in imgui_test_engine/imgui_te_utils.cpp for a
|
|
// Unix compatible version).
|
|
bool ConfigDebugIgnoreFocusLoss; // = false // Ignore io.AddFocusEvent(false), consequently not calling io.ClearInputKeys() in input processing.
|
|
|
|
// Options to audit .ini data
|
|
bool ConfigDebugIniSettings; // = false // Save .ini data with extra comments (particularly helpful for Docking, but makes saving slower)
|
|
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// Platform Functions
|
|
// (the imgui_impl_xxxx backend files are setting those up for you)
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Optional: Platform/Renderer backend name (informational only! will be displayed in About Window) + User data for backend/wrappers to store their own
|
|
// stuff.
|
|
const char *BackendPlatformName; // = NULL
|
|
const char *BackendRendererName; // = NULL
|
|
void *BackendPlatformUserData; // = NULL // User data for platform backend
|
|
void *BackendRendererUserData; // = NULL // User data for renderer backend
|
|
void *BackendLanguageUserData; // = NULL // User data for non C++ programming language backend
|
|
|
|
// Optional: Access OS clipboard
|
|
// (default to use native Win32 clipboard on Windows, otherwise uses a private clipboard. Override to access OS clipboard on other architectures)
|
|
const char *(*GetClipboardTextFn)(void *user_data);
|
|
void (*SetClipboardTextFn)(void *user_data, const char *text);
|
|
void *ClipboardUserData;
|
|
|
|
// Optional: Notify OS Input Method Editor of the screen position of your cursor for text input position (e.g. when using Japanese/Chinese IME on Windows)
|
|
// (default to use native imm32 api on Windows)
|
|
void (*SetPlatformImeDataFn)(ImGuiViewport *viewport, ImGuiPlatformImeData *data);
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
|
|
void *ImeWindowHandle; // = NULL // [Obsolete] Set ImGuiViewport::PlatformHandleRaw instead. Set this to your HWND to get automatic IME cursor
|
|
// positioning.
|
|
#else
|
|
void *_UnusedPadding; // Unused field to keep data structure the same size.
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Optional: Platform locale
|
|
ImWchar PlatformLocaleDecimalPoint; // '.' // [Experimental] Configure decimal point e.g. '.' or ',' useful for some languages (e.g. German),
|
|
// generally pulled from *localeconv()->decimal_point
|
|
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// Input - Call before calling NewFrame()
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Input Functions
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey key, bool down); // Queue a new key down/up event. Key should be "translated" (as in, generally ImGuiKey_A matches the
|
|
// key end-user would use to emit an 'A' character)
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
AddKeyAnalogEvent(ImGuiKey key,
|
|
bool down,
|
|
float v); // Queue a new key down/up event for analog values (e.g. ImGuiKey_Gamepad_ values). Dead-zones should be handled by the backend.
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddMousePosEvent(float x,
|
|
float y); // Queue a mouse position update. Use -FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX to signify no mouse (e.g. app not focused and not hovered)
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddMouseButtonEvent(int button, bool down); // Queue a mouse button change
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddMouseWheelEvent(
|
|
float wheel_x,
|
|
float wheel_y); // Queue a mouse wheel update. wheel_y<0: scroll down, wheel_y>0: scroll up, wheel_x<0: scroll right, wheel_x>0: scroll left.
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddMouseSourceEvent(ImGuiMouseSource source); // Queue a mouse source change (Mouse/TouchScreen/Pen)
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddFocusEvent(bool focused); // Queue a gain/loss of focus for the application (generally based on OS/platform focus of your window)
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddInputCharacter(unsigned int c); // Queue a new character input
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddInputCharacterUTF16(ImWchar16 c); // Queue a new character input from a UTF-16 character, it can be a surrogate
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddInputCharactersUTF8(const char *str); // Queue a new characters input from a UTF-8 string
|
|
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetKeyEventNativeData(
|
|
ImGuiKey key,
|
|
int native_keycode,
|
|
int native_scancode,
|
|
int native_legacy_index = -1); // [Optional] Specify index for legacy <1.87 IsKeyXXX() functions with native indices + specify native keycode, scancode.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetAppAcceptingEvents(
|
|
bool accepting_events); // Set master flag for accepting key/mouse/text events (default to true). Useful if you have native dialog boxes that are
|
|
// interrupting your application loop/refresh, and you want to disable events being queued while your app is frozen.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ClearEventsQueue(); // Clear all incoming events.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ClearInputKeys(); // Clear current keyboard/mouse/gamepad state + current frame text input buffer. Equivalent to releasing all keys/buttons.
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
|
|
IMGUI_API void ClearInputCharacters(); // [Obsolete] Clear the current frame text input buffer. Now included within ClearInputKeys().
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// Output - Updated by NewFrame() or EndFrame()/Render()
|
|
// (when reading from the io.WantCaptureMouse, io.WantCaptureKeyboard flags to dispatch your inputs, it is
|
|
// generally easier and more correct to use their state BEFORE calling NewFrame(). See FAQ for details!)
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
bool WantCaptureMouse; // Set when Dear ImGui will use mouse inputs, in this case do not dispatch them to your main game/application (either way, always
|
|
// pass on mouse inputs to imgui). (e.g. unclicked mouse is hovering over an imgui window, widget is active, mouse was clicked over
|
|
// an imgui window, etc.).
|
|
bool WantCaptureKeyboard; // Set when Dear ImGui will use keyboard inputs, in this case do not dispatch them to your main game/application (either way,
|
|
// always pass keyboard inputs to imgui). (e.g. InputText active, or an imgui window is focused and navigation is enabled, etc.).
|
|
bool WantTextInput; // Mobile/console: when set, you may display an on-screen keyboard. This is set by Dear ImGui when it wants textual keyboard input to
|
|
// happen (e.g. when a InputText widget is active).
|
|
bool WantSetMousePos; // MousePos has been altered, backend should reposition mouse on next frame. Rarely used! Set only when
|
|
// ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos flag is enabled.
|
|
bool WantSaveIniSettings; // When manual .ini load/save is active (io.IniFilename == NULL), this will be set to notify your application that you can call
|
|
// SaveIniSettingsToMemory() and save yourself. Important: clear io.WantSaveIniSettings yourself after saving!
|
|
bool NavActive; // Keyboard/Gamepad navigation is currently allowed (will handle ImGuiKey_NavXXX events) = a window is focused and it doesn't use the
|
|
// ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs flag.
|
|
bool NavVisible; // Keyboard/Gamepad navigation is visible and allowed (will handle ImGuiKey_NavXXX events).
|
|
float Framerate; // Estimate of application framerate (rolling average over 60 frames, based on io.DeltaTime), in frame per second. Solely for convenience.
|
|
// Slow applications may not want to use a moving average or may want to reset underlying buffers occasionally.
|
|
int MetricsRenderVertices; // Vertices output during last call to Render()
|
|
int MetricsRenderIndices; // Indices output during last call to Render() = number of triangles * 3
|
|
int MetricsRenderWindows; // Number of visible windows
|
|
int MetricsActiveWindows; // Number of active windows
|
|
int MetricsActiveAllocations; // Number of active allocations, updated by MemAlloc/MemFree based on current context. May be off if you have multiple imgui
|
|
// contexts.
|
|
ImVec2 MouseDelta; // Mouse delta. Note that this is zero if either current or previous position are invalid (-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX), so a
|
|
// disappearing/reappearing mouse won't have a huge delta.
|
|
|
|
// Legacy: before 1.87, we required backend to fill io.KeyMap[] (imgui->native map) during initialization and io.KeysDown[] (native indices) every frame.
|
|
// This is still temporarily supported as a legacy feature. However the new preferred scheme is for backend to call io.AddKeyEvent().
|
|
// Old (<1.87): ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGui::GetIO().KeyMap[ImGuiKey_Space]) --> New (1.87+) ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Space)
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
|
|
int KeyMap[ImGuiKey_COUNT]; // [LEGACY] Input: map of indices into the KeysDown[512] entries array which represent your "native" keyboard state. The first
|
|
// 512 are now unused and should be kept zero. Legacy backend will write into KeyMap[] using ImGuiKey_ indices which are always
|
|
// >512.
|
|
bool KeysDown[ImGuiKey_COUNT]; // [LEGACY] Input: Keyboard keys that are pressed (ideally left in the "native" order your engine has access to keyboard
|
|
// keys, so you can use your own defines/enums for keys). This used to be [512] sized. It is now ImGuiKey_COUNT to allow
|
|
// legacy io.KeysDown[GetKeyIndex(...)] to work without an overflow.
|
|
float NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_COUNT]; // [LEGACY] Since 1.88, NavInputs[] was removed. Backends from 1.60 to 1.86 won't build. Feed gamepad inputs via
|
|
// io.AddKeyEvent() and ImGuiKey_GamepadXXX enums.
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [Internal] Dear ImGui will maintain those fields. Forward compatibility not guaranteed!
|
|
//------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
ImGuiContext *Ctx; // Parent UI context (needs to be set explicitly by parent).
|
|
|
|
// Main Input State
|
|
// (this block used to be written by backend, since 1.87 it is best to NOT write to those directly, call the AddXXX functions above instead)
|
|
// (reading from those variables is fair game, as they are extremely unlikely to be moving anywhere)
|
|
ImVec2 MousePos; // Mouse position, in pixels. Set to ImVec2(-FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX) if mouse is unavailable (on another screen, etc.)
|
|
bool MouseDown[5]; // Mouse buttons: 0=left, 1=right, 2=middle + extras (ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT == 5). Dear ImGui mostly uses left and right buttons. Other
|
|
// buttons allow us to track if the mouse is being used by your application + available to user as a convenience via IsMouse** API.
|
|
float MouseWheel; // Mouse wheel Vertical: 1 unit scrolls about 5 lines text. >0 scrolls Up, <0 scrolls Down. Hold SHIFT to turn vertical scroll into
|
|
// horizontal scroll.
|
|
float MouseWheelH; // Mouse wheel Horizontal. >0 scrolls Left, <0 scrolls Right. Most users don't have a mouse with a horizontal wheel, may not be filled by
|
|
// all backends.
|
|
ImGuiMouseSource MouseSource; // Mouse actual input peripheral (Mouse/TouchScreen/Pen).
|
|
bool KeyCtrl; // Keyboard modifier down: Control
|
|
bool KeyShift; // Keyboard modifier down: Shift
|
|
bool KeyAlt; // Keyboard modifier down: Alt
|
|
bool KeySuper; // Keyboard modifier down: Cmd/Super/Windows
|
|
|
|
// Other state maintained from data above + IO function calls
|
|
ImGuiKeyChord KeyMods; // Key mods flags (any of ImGuiMod_Ctrl/ImGuiMod_Shift/ImGuiMod_Alt/ImGuiMod_Super flags, same as io.KeyCtrl/KeyShift/KeyAlt/KeySuper
|
|
// but merged into flags. DOES NOT CONTAINS ImGuiMod_Shortcut which is pretranslated). Read-only, updated by NewFrame()
|
|
ImGuiKeyData KeysData[ImGuiKey_KeysData_SIZE]; // Key state for all known keys. Use IsKeyXXX() functions to access this.
|
|
bool WantCaptureMouseUnlessPopupClose; // Alternative to WantCaptureMouse: (WantCaptureMouse == true && WantCaptureMouseUnlessPopupClose == false) when a
|
|
// click over void is expected to close a popup.
|
|
ImVec2 MousePosPrev; // Previous mouse position (note that MouseDelta is not necessary == MousePos-MousePosPrev, in case either position is invalid)
|
|
ImVec2 MouseClickedPos[5]; // Position at time of clicking
|
|
double MouseClickedTime[5]; // Time of last click (used to figure out double-click)
|
|
bool MouseClicked[5]; // Mouse button went from !Down to Down (same as MouseClickedCount[x] != 0)
|
|
bool MouseDoubleClicked[5]; // Has mouse button been double-clicked? (same as MouseClickedCount[x] == 2)
|
|
ImU16 MouseClickedCount[5]; // == 0 (not clicked), == 1 (same as MouseClicked[]), == 2 (double-clicked), == 3 (triple-clicked) etc. when going from !Down to
|
|
// Down
|
|
ImU16 MouseClickedLastCount[5]; // Count successive number of clicks. Stays valid after mouse release. Reset after another click is done.
|
|
bool MouseReleased[5]; // Mouse button went from Down to !Down
|
|
bool MouseDownOwned[5]; // Track if button was clicked inside a dear imgui window or over void blocked by a popup. We don't request mouse capture from the
|
|
// application if click started outside ImGui bounds.
|
|
bool MouseDownOwnedUnlessPopupClose[5]; // Track if button was clicked inside a dear imgui window.
|
|
bool MouseWheelRequestAxisSwap; // On a non-Mac system, holding SHIFT requests WheelY to perform the equivalent of a WheelX event. On a Mac system this is
|
|
// already enforced by the system.
|
|
float MouseDownDuration[5]; // Duration the mouse button has been down (0.0f == just clicked)
|
|
float MouseDownDurationPrev[5]; // Previous time the mouse button has been down
|
|
float MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[5]; // Squared maximum distance of how much mouse has traveled from the clicking point (used for moving thresholds)
|
|
float PenPressure; // Touch/Pen pressure (0.0f to 1.0f, should be >0.0f only when MouseDown[0] == true). Helper storage currently unused by Dear ImGui.
|
|
bool AppFocusLost; // Only modify via AddFocusEvent()
|
|
bool AppAcceptingEvents; // Only modify via SetAppAcceptingEvents()
|
|
ImS8 BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays; // -1: unknown, 0: using AddKeyEvent(), 1: using legacy io.KeysDown[]
|
|
bool BackendUsingLegacyNavInputArray; // 0: using AddKeyAnalogEvent(), 1: writing to legacy io.NavInputs[] directly
|
|
ImWchar16 InputQueueSurrogate; // For AddInputCharacterUTF16()
|
|
ImVector<ImWchar> InputQueueCharacters; // Queue of _characters_ input (obtained by platform backend). Fill using AddInputCharacter() helper.
|
|
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiIO();
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Misc data structures
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Shared state of InputText(), passed as an argument to your callback when a ImGuiInputTextFlags_Callback* flag is used.
|
|
// The callback function should return 0 by default.
|
|
// Callbacks (follow a flag name and see comments in ImGuiInputTextFlags_ declarations for more details)
|
|
// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit: Callback on buffer edit (note that InputText() already returns true on edit, the callback is useful mainly to
|
|
// manipulate the underlying buffer while focus is active)
|
|
// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways: Callback on each iteration
|
|
// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion: Callback on pressing TAB
|
|
// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory: Callback on pressing Up/Down arrows
|
|
// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter: Callback on character inputs to replace or discard them. Modify 'EventChar' to replace or discard, or return 1 in
|
|
// callback to discard.
|
|
// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize: Callback on buffer capacity changes request (beyond 'buf_size' parameter value), allowing the string to grow.
|
|
struct ImGuiInputTextCallbackData {
|
|
ImGuiContext *Ctx; // Parent UI context
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags EventFlag; // One ImGuiInputTextFlags_Callback* // Read-only
|
|
ImGuiInputTextFlags Flags; // What user passed to InputText() // Read-only
|
|
void *UserData; // What user passed to InputText() // Read-only
|
|
|
|
// Arguments for the different callback events
|
|
// - To modify the text buffer in a callback, prefer using the InsertChars() / DeleteChars() function. InsertChars() will take care of calling the resize
|
|
// callback if necessary.
|
|
// - If you know your edits are not going to resize the underlying buffer allocation, you may modify the contents of 'Buf[]' directly. You need to update
|
|
// 'BufTextLen' accordingly (0 <= BufTextLen < BufSize) and set 'BufDirty'' to true so InputText can update its internal state.
|
|
ImWchar EventChar; // Character input // Read-write // [CharFilter] Replace character with another one, or set to zero to drop.
|
|
// return 1 is equivalent to setting EventChar=0;
|
|
ImGuiKey EventKey; // Key pressed (Up/Down/TAB) // Read-only // [Completion,History]
|
|
char *Buf; // Text buffer // Read-write // [Resize] Can replace pointer / [Completion,History,Always] Only write to pointed data,
|
|
// don't replace the actual pointer!
|
|
int BufTextLen; // Text length (in bytes) // Read-write // [Resize,Completion,History,Always] Exclude zero-terminator storage. In C land: ==
|
|
// strlen(some_text), in C++ land: string.length()
|
|
int BufSize; // Buffer size (in bytes) = capacity+1 // Read-only // [Resize,Completion,History,Always] Include zero-terminator storage. In C land ==
|
|
// ARRAYSIZE(my_char_array), in C++ land: string.capacity()+1
|
|
bool BufDirty; // Set if you modify Buf/BufTextLen! // Write // [Completion,History,Always]
|
|
int CursorPos; // // Read-write // [Completion,History,Always]
|
|
int SelectionStart; // // Read-write // [Completion,History,Always] == to SelectionEnd when no selection)
|
|
int SelectionEnd; // // Read-write // [Completion,History,Always]
|
|
|
|
// Helper functions for text manipulation.
|
|
// Use those function to benefit from the CallbackResize behaviors. Calling those function reset the selection.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiInputTextCallbackData();
|
|
IMGUI_API void DeleteChars(int pos, int bytes_count);
|
|
IMGUI_API void InsertChars(int pos, const char *text, const char *text_end = NULL);
|
|
void SelectAll()
|
|
{
|
|
SelectionStart = 0;
|
|
SelectionEnd = BufTextLen;
|
|
}
|
|
void ClearSelection()
|
|
{
|
|
SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = BufTextLen;
|
|
}
|
|
bool HasSelection() const
|
|
{
|
|
return SelectionStart != SelectionEnd;
|
|
}
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Resizing callback data to apply custom constraint. As enabled by SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(). Callback is called during the next Begin().
|
|
// NB: For basic min/max size constraint on each axis you don't need to use the callback! The SetNextWindowSizeConstraints() parameters are enough.
|
|
struct ImGuiSizeCallbackData {
|
|
void *UserData; // Read-only. What user passed to SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(). Generally store an integer or float in here (need reinterpret_cast<>).
|
|
ImVec2 Pos; // Read-only. Window position, for reference.
|
|
ImVec2 CurrentSize; // Read-only. Current window size.
|
|
ImVec2 DesiredSize; // Read-write. Desired size, based on user's mouse position. Write to this field to restrain resizing.
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Data payload for Drag and Drop operations: AcceptDragDropPayload(), GetDragDropPayload()
|
|
struct ImGuiPayload {
|
|
// Members
|
|
void *Data; // Data (copied and owned by dear imgui)
|
|
int DataSize; // Data size
|
|
|
|
// [Internal]
|
|
ImGuiID SourceId; // Source item id
|
|
ImGuiID SourceParentId; // Source parent id (if available)
|
|
int DataFrameCount; // Data timestamp
|
|
char DataType[32 + 1]; // Data type tag (short user-supplied string, 32 characters max)
|
|
bool Preview; // Set when AcceptDragDropPayload() was called and mouse has been hovering the target item (nb: handle overlapping drag targets)
|
|
bool Delivery; // Set when AcceptDragDropPayload() was called and mouse button is released over the target item.
|
|
|
|
ImGuiPayload()
|
|
{
|
|
Clear();
|
|
}
|
|
void Clear()
|
|
{
|
|
SourceId = SourceParentId = 0;
|
|
Data = NULL;
|
|
DataSize = 0;
|
|
memset(DataType, 0, sizeof(DataType));
|
|
DataFrameCount = -1;
|
|
Preview = Delivery = false;
|
|
}
|
|
bool IsDataType(const char *type) const
|
|
{
|
|
return DataFrameCount != -1 && strcmp(type, DataType) == 0;
|
|
}
|
|
bool IsPreview() const
|
|
{
|
|
return Preview;
|
|
}
|
|
bool IsDelivery() const
|
|
{
|
|
return Delivery;
|
|
}
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Sorting specification for one column of a table (sizeof == 12 bytes)
|
|
struct ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs {
|
|
ImGuiID ColumnUserID; // User id of the column (if specified by a TableSetupColumn() call)
|
|
ImS16 ColumnIndex; // Index of the column
|
|
ImS16 SortOrder; // Index within parent ImGuiTableSortSpecs (always stored in order starting from 0, tables sorted on a single criteria will always have a 0
|
|
// here)
|
|
ImGuiSortDirection SortDirection : 8; // ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending or ImGuiSortDirection_Descending (you can use this or SortSign, whichever is more
|
|
// convenient for your sort function)
|
|
|
|
ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs()
|
|
{
|
|
memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
|
|
}
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Sorting specifications for a table (often handling sort specs for a single column, occasionally more)
|
|
// Obtained by calling TableGetSortSpecs().
|
|
// When 'SpecsDirty == true' you can sort your data. It will be true with sorting specs have changed since last call, or the first time.
|
|
// Make sure to set 'SpecsDirty = false' after sorting, else you may wastefully sort your data every frame!
|
|
struct ImGuiTableSortSpecs {
|
|
const ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs *Specs; // Pointer to sort spec array.
|
|
int SpecsCount; // Sort spec count. Most often 1. May be > 1 when ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti is enabled. May be == 0 when ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate is
|
|
// enabled.
|
|
bool SpecsDirty; // Set to true when specs have changed since last time! Use this to sort again, then clear the flag.
|
|
|
|
ImGuiTableSortSpecs()
|
|
{
|
|
memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
|
|
}
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Helpers (ImGuiOnceUponAFrame, ImGuiTextFilter, ImGuiTextBuffer, ImGuiStorage, ImGuiListClipper, Math Operators, ImColor)
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Helper: Unicode defines
|
|
#define IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_INVALID 0xFFFD // Invalid Unicode code point (standard value).
|
|
#ifdef IMGUI_USE_WCHAR32
|
|
#define IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX 0x10FFFF // Maximum Unicode code point supported by this build.
|
|
#else
|
|
#define IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX 0xFFFF // Maximum Unicode code point supported by this build.
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Helper: Execute a block of code at maximum once a frame. Convenient if you want to quickly create a UI within deep-nested code that runs multiple times every
|
|
// frame. Usage: static ImGuiOnceUponAFrame oaf; if (oaf) ImGui::Text("This will be called only once per frame");
|
|
struct ImGuiOnceUponAFrame {
|
|
ImGuiOnceUponAFrame()
|
|
{
|
|
RefFrame = -1;
|
|
}
|
|
mutable int RefFrame;
|
|
operator bool() const
|
|
{
|
|
int current_frame = ImGui::GetFrameCount();
|
|
if (RefFrame == current_frame)
|
|
return false;
|
|
RefFrame = current_frame;
|
|
return true;
|
|
}
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Helper: Parse and apply text filters. In format "aaaaa[,bbbb][,ccccc]"
|
|
struct ImGuiTextFilter {
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiTextFilter(const char *default_filter = "");
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Draw(const char *label = "Filter (inc,-exc)", float width = 0.0f); // Helper calling InputText+Build
|
|
IMGUI_API bool PassFilter(const char *text, const char *text_end = NULL) const;
|
|
IMGUI_API void Build();
|
|
void Clear()
|
|
{
|
|
InputBuf[0] = 0;
|
|
Build();
|
|
}
|
|
bool IsActive() const
|
|
{
|
|
return !Filters.empty();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// [Internal]
|
|
struct ImGuiTextRange {
|
|
const char *b;
|
|
const char *e;
|
|
|
|
ImGuiTextRange()
|
|
{
|
|
b = e = NULL;
|
|
}
|
|
ImGuiTextRange(const char *_b, const char *_e)
|
|
{
|
|
b = _b;
|
|
e = _e;
|
|
}
|
|
bool empty() const
|
|
{
|
|
return b == e;
|
|
}
|
|
IMGUI_API void split(char separator, ImVector<ImGuiTextRange> *out) const;
|
|
};
|
|
char InputBuf[256];
|
|
ImVector<ImGuiTextRange> Filters;
|
|
int CountGrep;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Helper: Growable text buffer for logging/accumulating text
|
|
// (this could be called 'ImGuiTextBuilder' / 'ImGuiStringBuilder')
|
|
struct ImGuiTextBuffer {
|
|
ImVector<char> Buf;
|
|
IMGUI_API static char EmptyString[1];
|
|
|
|
ImGuiTextBuffer()
|
|
{
|
|
}
|
|
inline char operator[](int i) const
|
|
{
|
|
IM_ASSERT(Buf.Data != NULL);
|
|
return Buf.Data[i];
|
|
}
|
|
const char *begin() const
|
|
{
|
|
return Buf.Data ? &Buf.front() : EmptyString;
|
|
}
|
|
const char *end() const
|
|
{
|
|
return Buf.Data ? &Buf.back() : EmptyString;
|
|
} // Buf is zero-terminated, so end() will point on the zero-terminator
|
|
int size() const
|
|
{
|
|
return Buf.Size ? Buf.Size - 1 : 0;
|
|
}
|
|
bool empty() const
|
|
{
|
|
return Buf.Size <= 1;
|
|
}
|
|
void clear()
|
|
{
|
|
Buf.clear();
|
|
}
|
|
void reserve(int capacity)
|
|
{
|
|
Buf.reserve(capacity);
|
|
}
|
|
const char *c_str() const
|
|
{
|
|
return Buf.Data ? Buf.Data : EmptyString;
|
|
}
|
|
IMGUI_API void append(const char *str, const char *str_end = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API void appendf(const char *fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2);
|
|
IMGUI_API void appendfv(const char *fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2);
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Helper: Key->Value storage
|
|
// Typically you don't have to worry about this since a storage is held within each Window.
|
|
// We use it to e.g. store collapse state for a tree (Int 0/1)
|
|
// This is optimized for efficient lookup (dichotomy into a contiguous buffer) and rare insertion (typically tied to user interactions aka max once a frame)
|
|
// You can use it as custom user storage for temporary values. Declare your own storage if, for example:
|
|
// - You want to manipulate the open/close state of a particular sub-tree in your interface (tree node uses Int 0/1 to store their state).
|
|
// - You want to store custom debug data easily without adding or editing structures in your code (probably not efficient, but convenient)
|
|
// Types are NOT stored, so it is up to you to make sure your Key don't collide with different types.
|
|
struct ImGuiStorage {
|
|
// [Internal]
|
|
struct ImGuiStoragePair {
|
|
ImGuiID key;
|
|
union {
|
|
int val_i;
|
|
float val_f;
|
|
void *val_p;
|
|
};
|
|
ImGuiStoragePair(ImGuiID _key, int _val_i)
|
|
{
|
|
key = _key;
|
|
val_i = _val_i;
|
|
}
|
|
ImGuiStoragePair(ImGuiID _key, float _val_f)
|
|
{
|
|
key = _key;
|
|
val_f = _val_f;
|
|
}
|
|
ImGuiStoragePair(ImGuiID _key, void *_val_p)
|
|
{
|
|
key = _key;
|
|
val_p = _val_p;
|
|
}
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
ImVector<ImGuiStoragePair> Data;
|
|
|
|
// - Get***() functions find pair, never add/allocate. Pairs are sorted so a query is O(log N)
|
|
// - Set***() functions find pair, insertion on demand if missing.
|
|
// - Sorted insertion is costly, paid once. A typical frame shouldn't need to insert any new pair.
|
|
void Clear()
|
|
{
|
|
Data.clear();
|
|
}
|
|
IMGUI_API int GetInt(ImGuiID key, int default_val = 0) const;
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetInt(ImGuiID key, int val);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool GetBool(ImGuiID key, bool default_val = false) const;
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetBool(ImGuiID key, bool val);
|
|
IMGUI_API float GetFloat(ImGuiID key, float default_val = 0.0f) const;
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetFloat(ImGuiID key, float val);
|
|
IMGUI_API void *GetVoidPtr(ImGuiID key) const; // default_val is NULL
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetVoidPtr(ImGuiID key, void *val);
|
|
|
|
// - Get***Ref() functions finds pair, insert on demand if missing, return pointer. Useful if you intend to do Get+Set.
|
|
// - References are only valid until a new value is added to the storage. Calling a Set***() function or a Get***Ref() function invalidates the pointer.
|
|
// - A typical use case where this is convenient for quick hacking (e.g. add storage during a live Edit&Continue session if you can't modify existing
|
|
// struct)
|
|
// float* pvar = ImGui::GetFloatRef(key); ImGui::SliderFloat("var", pvar, 0, 100.0f); some_var += *pvar;
|
|
IMGUI_API int *GetIntRef(ImGuiID key, int default_val = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool *GetBoolRef(ImGuiID key, bool default_val = false);
|
|
IMGUI_API float *GetFloatRef(ImGuiID key, float default_val = 0.0f);
|
|
IMGUI_API void **GetVoidPtrRef(ImGuiID key, void *default_val = NULL);
|
|
|
|
// Use on your own storage if you know only integer are being stored (open/close all tree nodes)
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetAllInt(int val);
|
|
|
|
// For quicker full rebuild of a storage (instead of an incremental one), you may add all your contents and then sort once.
|
|
IMGUI_API void BuildSortByKey();
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Helper: Manually clip large list of items.
|
|
// If you have lots evenly spaced items and you have random access to the list, you can perform coarse
|
|
// clipping based on visibility to only submit items that are in view.
|
|
// The clipper calculates the range of visible items and advance the cursor to compensate for the non-visible items we have skipped.
|
|
// (Dear ImGui already clip items based on their bounds but: it needs to first layout the item to do so, and generally
|
|
// fetching/submitting your own data incurs additional cost. Coarse clipping using ImGuiListClipper allows you to easily
|
|
// scale using lists with tens of thousands of items without a problem)
|
|
// Usage:
|
|
// ImGuiListClipper clipper;
|
|
// clipper.Begin(1000); // We have 1000 elements, evenly spaced.
|
|
// while (clipper.Step())
|
|
// for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++)
|
|
// ImGui::Text("line number %d", i);
|
|
// Generally what happens is:
|
|
// - Clipper lets you process the first element (DisplayStart = 0, DisplayEnd = 1) regardless of it being visible or not.
|
|
// - User code submit that one element.
|
|
// - Clipper can measure the height of the first element
|
|
// - Clipper calculate the actual range of elements to display based on the current clipping rectangle, position the cursor before the first visible element.
|
|
// - User code submit visible elements.
|
|
// - The clipper also handles various subtleties related to keyboard/gamepad navigation, wrapping etc.
|
|
struct ImGuiListClipper {
|
|
ImGuiContext *Ctx; // Parent UI context
|
|
int DisplayStart; // First item to display, updated by each call to Step()
|
|
int DisplayEnd; // End of items to display (exclusive)
|
|
int ItemsCount; // [Internal] Number of items
|
|
float ItemsHeight; // [Internal] Height of item after a first step and item submission can calculate it
|
|
float StartPosY; // [Internal] Cursor position at the time of Begin() or after table frozen rows are all processed
|
|
void *TempData; // [Internal] Internal data
|
|
|
|
// items_count: Use INT_MAX if you don't know how many items you have (in which case the cursor won't be advanced in the final step)
|
|
// items_height: Use -1.0f to be calculated automatically on first step. Otherwise pass in the distance between your items, typically
|
|
// GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() or GetFrameHeightWithSpacing().
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiListClipper();
|
|
IMGUI_API ~ImGuiListClipper();
|
|
IMGUI_API void Begin(int items_count, float items_height = -1.0f);
|
|
IMGUI_API void End(); // Automatically called on the last call of Step() that returns false.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Step(); // Call until it returns false. The DisplayStart/DisplayEnd fields will be set and you can process/draw those items.
|
|
|
|
// Call IncludeItemByIndex() or IncludeItemsByIndex() *BEFORE* first call to Step() if you need a range of items to not be clipped, regardless of their
|
|
// visibility. (Due to alignment / padding of certain items it is possible that an extra item may be included on either end of the display range).
|
|
inline void IncludeItemByIndex(int item_index)
|
|
{
|
|
IncludeItemsByIndex(item_index, item_index + 1);
|
|
}
|
|
IMGUI_API void IncludeItemsByIndex(int item_begin, int item_end); // item_end is exclusive e.g. use (42, 42+1) to make item 42 never clipped.
|
|
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
|
|
inline void IncludeRangeByIndices(int item_begin, int item_end)
|
|
{
|
|
IncludeItemsByIndex(item_begin, item_end);
|
|
} // [renamed in 1.89.9]
|
|
inline void ForceDisplayRangeByIndices(int item_begin, int item_end)
|
|
{
|
|
IncludeItemsByIndex(item_begin, item_end);
|
|
} // [renamed in 1.89.6]
|
|
// inline ImGuiListClipper(int items_count, float items_height = -1.0f) { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); ItemsCount = -1; Begin(items_count, items_height);
|
|
// } // [removed in 1.79]
|
|
#endif
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Helpers: ImVec2/ImVec4 operators
|
|
// - It is important that we are keeping those disabled by default so they don't leak in user space.
|
|
// - This is in order to allow user enabling implicit cast operators between ImVec2/ImVec4 and their own types (using IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA in imconfig.h)
|
|
// - You can use '#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS' to import our operators, provided as a courtesy.
|
|
#ifdef IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
|
|
#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS_IMPLEMENTED
|
|
IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF
|
|
static inline ImVec2 operator*(const ImVec2 &lhs, const float rhs)
|
|
{
|
|
return ImVec2(lhs.x * rhs, lhs.y * rhs);
|
|
}
|
|
static inline ImVec2 operator/(const ImVec2 &lhs, const float rhs)
|
|
{
|
|
return ImVec2(lhs.x / rhs, lhs.y / rhs);
|
|
}
|
|
static inline ImVec2 operator+(const ImVec2 &lhs, const ImVec2 &rhs)
|
|
{
|
|
return ImVec2(lhs.x + rhs.x, lhs.y + rhs.y);
|
|
}
|
|
static inline ImVec2 operator-(const ImVec2 &lhs, const ImVec2 &rhs)
|
|
{
|
|
return ImVec2(lhs.x - rhs.x, lhs.y - rhs.y);
|
|
}
|
|
static inline ImVec2 operator*(const ImVec2 &lhs, const ImVec2 &rhs)
|
|
{
|
|
return ImVec2(lhs.x * rhs.x, lhs.y * rhs.y);
|
|
}
|
|
static inline ImVec2 operator/(const ImVec2 &lhs, const ImVec2 &rhs)
|
|
{
|
|
return ImVec2(lhs.x / rhs.x, lhs.y / rhs.y);
|
|
}
|
|
static inline ImVec2 operator-(const ImVec2 &lhs)
|
|
{
|
|
return ImVec2(-lhs.x, -lhs.y);
|
|
}
|
|
static inline ImVec2 &operator*=(ImVec2 &lhs, const float rhs)
|
|
{
|
|
lhs.x *= rhs;
|
|
lhs.y *= rhs;
|
|
return lhs;
|
|
}
|
|
static inline ImVec2 &operator/=(ImVec2 &lhs, const float rhs)
|
|
{
|
|
lhs.x /= rhs;
|
|
lhs.y /= rhs;
|
|
return lhs;
|
|
}
|
|
static inline ImVec2 &operator+=(ImVec2 &lhs, const ImVec2 &rhs)
|
|
{
|
|
lhs.x += rhs.x;
|
|
lhs.y += rhs.y;
|
|
return lhs;
|
|
}
|
|
static inline ImVec2 &operator-=(ImVec2 &lhs, const ImVec2 &rhs)
|
|
{
|
|
lhs.x -= rhs.x;
|
|
lhs.y -= rhs.y;
|
|
return lhs;
|
|
}
|
|
static inline ImVec2 &operator*=(ImVec2 &lhs, const ImVec2 &rhs)
|
|
{
|
|
lhs.x *= rhs.x;
|
|
lhs.y *= rhs.y;
|
|
return lhs;
|
|
}
|
|
static inline ImVec2 &operator/=(ImVec2 &lhs, const ImVec2 &rhs)
|
|
{
|
|
lhs.x /= rhs.x;
|
|
lhs.y /= rhs.y;
|
|
return lhs;
|
|
}
|
|
static inline ImVec4 operator+(const ImVec4 &lhs, const ImVec4 &rhs)
|
|
{
|
|
return ImVec4(lhs.x + rhs.x, lhs.y + rhs.y, lhs.z + rhs.z, lhs.w + rhs.w);
|
|
}
|
|
static inline ImVec4 operator-(const ImVec4 &lhs, const ImVec4 &rhs)
|
|
{
|
|
return ImVec4(lhs.x - rhs.x, lhs.y - rhs.y, lhs.z - rhs.z, lhs.w - rhs.w);
|
|
}
|
|
static inline ImVec4 operator*(const ImVec4 &lhs, const ImVec4 &rhs)
|
|
{
|
|
return ImVec4(lhs.x * rhs.x, lhs.y * rhs.y, lhs.z * rhs.z, lhs.w * rhs.w);
|
|
}
|
|
IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Helpers macros to generate 32-bit encoded colors
|
|
// User can declare their own format by #defining the 5 _SHIFT/_MASK macros in their imconfig file.
|
|
#ifndef IM_COL32_R_SHIFT
|
|
#ifdef IMGUI_USE_BGRA_PACKED_COLOR
|
|
#define IM_COL32_R_SHIFT 16
|
|
#define IM_COL32_G_SHIFT 8
|
|
#define IM_COL32_B_SHIFT 0
|
|
#define IM_COL32_A_SHIFT 24
|
|
#define IM_COL32_A_MASK 0xFF000000
|
|
#else
|
|
#define IM_COL32_R_SHIFT 0
|
|
#define IM_COL32_G_SHIFT 8
|
|
#define IM_COL32_B_SHIFT 16
|
|
#define IM_COL32_A_SHIFT 24
|
|
#define IM_COL32_A_MASK 0xFF000000
|
|
#endif
|
|
#endif
|
|
#define IM_COL32(R, G, B, A) \
|
|
(((ImU32)(A) << IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) | ((ImU32)(B) << IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) | ((ImU32)(G) << IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) | ((ImU32)(R) << IM_COL32_R_SHIFT))
|
|
#define IM_COL32_WHITE IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255) // Opaque white = 0xFFFFFFFF
|
|
#define IM_COL32_BLACK IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, 255) // Opaque black
|
|
#define IM_COL32_BLACK_TRANS IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, 0) // Transparent black = 0x00000000
|
|
|
|
// Helper: ImColor() implicitly converts colors to either ImU32 (packed 4x1 byte) or ImVec4 (4x1 float)
|
|
// Prefer using IM_COL32() macros if you want a guaranteed compile-time ImU32 for usage with ImDrawList API.
|
|
// **Avoid storing ImColor! Store either u32 of ImVec4. This is not a full-featured color class. MAY OBSOLETE.
|
|
// **None of the ImGui API are using ImColor directly but you can use it as a convenience to pass colors in either ImU32 or ImVec4 formats. Explicitly cast to
|
|
// ImU32 or ImVec4 if needed.
|
|
struct ImColor {
|
|
ImVec4 Value;
|
|
|
|
constexpr ImColor()
|
|
{
|
|
}
|
|
constexpr ImColor(float r, float g, float b, float a = 1.0f)
|
|
: Value(r, g, b, a)
|
|
{
|
|
}
|
|
constexpr ImColor(const ImVec4 &col)
|
|
: Value(col)
|
|
{
|
|
}
|
|
constexpr ImColor(int r, int g, int b, int a = 255)
|
|
: Value((float)r * (1.0f / 255.0f), (float)g * (1.0f / 255.0f), (float)b * (1.0f / 255.0f), (float)a * (1.0f / 255.0f))
|
|
{
|
|
}
|
|
constexpr ImColor(ImU32 rgba)
|
|
: Value((float)((rgba >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * (1.0f / 255.0f),
|
|
(float)((rgba >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * (1.0f / 255.0f),
|
|
(float)((rgba >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * (1.0f / 255.0f),
|
|
(float)((rgba >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * (1.0f / 255.0f))
|
|
{
|
|
}
|
|
inline operator ImU32() const
|
|
{
|
|
return ImGui::ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(Value);
|
|
}
|
|
inline operator ImVec4() const
|
|
{
|
|
return Value;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// FIXME-OBSOLETE: May need to obsolete/cleanup those helpers.
|
|
inline void SetHSV(float h, float s, float v, float a = 1.0f)
|
|
{
|
|
ImGui::ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(h, s, v, Value.x, Value.y, Value.z);
|
|
Value.w = a;
|
|
}
|
|
static ImColor HSV(float h, float s, float v, float a = 1.0f)
|
|
{
|
|
float r, g, b;
|
|
ImGui::ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(h, s, v, r, g, b);
|
|
return ImColor(r, g, b, a);
|
|
}
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Drawing API (ImDrawCmd, ImDrawIdx, ImDrawVert, ImDrawChannel, ImDrawListSplitter, ImDrawListFlags, ImDrawList, ImDrawData)
|
|
// Hold a series of drawing commands. The user provides a renderer for ImDrawData which essentially contains an array of ImDrawList.
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// The maximum line width to bake anti-aliased textures for. Build atlas with ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines to disable baking.
|
|
#ifndef IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX
|
|
#define IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX (63)
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// ImDrawCallback: Draw callbacks for advanced uses [configurable type: override in imconfig.h]
|
|
// NB: You most likely do NOT need to use draw callbacks just to create your own widget or customized UI rendering,
|
|
// you can poke into the draw list for that! Draw callback may be useful for example to:
|
|
// A) Change your GPU render state,
|
|
// B) render a complex 3D scene inside a UI element without an intermediate texture/render target, etc.
|
|
// The expected behavior from your rendering function is 'if (cmd.UserCallback != NULL) { cmd.UserCallback(parent_list, cmd); } else { RenderTriangles() }'
|
|
// If you want to override the signature of ImDrawCallback, you can simply use e.g. '#define ImDrawCallback MyDrawCallback' (in imconfig.h) + update rendering
|
|
// backend accordingly.
|
|
#ifndef ImDrawCallback
|
|
typedef void (*ImDrawCallback)(const ImDrawList *parent_list, const ImDrawCmd *cmd);
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Special Draw callback value to request renderer backend to reset the graphics/render state.
|
|
// The renderer backend needs to handle this special value, otherwise it will crash trying to call a function at this address.
|
|
// This is useful for example if you submitted callbacks which you know have altered the render state and you want it to be restored.
|
|
// It is not done by default because they are many perfectly useful way of altering render state for imgui contents (e.g. changing shader/blending settings
|
|
// before an Image call).
|
|
#define ImDrawCallback_ResetRenderState (ImDrawCallback)(-1)
|
|
|
|
// Typically, 1 command = 1 GPU draw call (unless command is a callback)
|
|
// - VtxOffset: When 'io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset' is enabled,
|
|
// this fields allow us to render meshes larger than 64K vertices while keeping 16-bit indices.
|
|
// Backends made for <1.71. will typically ignore the VtxOffset fields.
|
|
// - The ClipRect/TextureId/VtxOffset fields must be contiguous as we memcmp() them together (this is asserted for).
|
|
struct ImDrawCmd {
|
|
ImVec4 ClipRect; // 4*4 // Clipping rectangle (x1, y1, x2, y2). Subtract ImDrawData->DisplayPos to get clipping rectangle in "viewport" coordinates
|
|
ImTextureID TextureId; // 4-8 // User-provided texture ID. Set by user in ImfontAtlas::SetTexID() for fonts or passed to Image*() functions. Ignore if
|
|
// never using images or multiple fonts atlas.
|
|
unsigned int VtxOffset; // 4 // Start offset in vertex buffer. ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset: always 0, otherwise may be >0 to support meshes
|
|
// larger than 64K vertices with 16-bit indices.
|
|
unsigned int IdxOffset; // 4 // Start offset in index buffer.
|
|
unsigned int ElemCount; // 4 // Number of indices (multiple of 3) to be rendered as triangles. Vertices are stored in the callee ImDrawList's
|
|
// vtx_buffer[] array, indices in idx_buffer[].
|
|
ImDrawCallback UserCallback; // 4-8 // If != NULL, call the function instead of rendering the vertices. clip_rect and texture_id will be set normally.
|
|
void *UserCallbackData; // 4-8 // The draw callback code can access this.
|
|
|
|
ImDrawCmd()
|
|
{
|
|
memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
|
|
} // Also ensure our padding fields are zeroed
|
|
|
|
// Since 1.83: returns ImTextureID associated with this draw call. Warning: DO NOT assume this is always same as 'TextureId' (we will change this function
|
|
// for an upcoming feature)
|
|
inline ImTextureID GetTexID() const
|
|
{
|
|
return TextureId;
|
|
}
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Vertex layout
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_OVERRIDE_DRAWVERT_STRUCT_LAYOUT
|
|
struct ImDrawVert {
|
|
ImVec2 pos;
|
|
ImVec2 uv;
|
|
ImU32 col;
|
|
};
|
|
#else
|
|
// You can override the vertex format layout by defining IMGUI_OVERRIDE_DRAWVERT_STRUCT_LAYOUT in imconfig.h
|
|
// The code expect ImVec2 pos (8 bytes), ImVec2 uv (8 bytes), ImU32 col (4 bytes), but you can re-order them or add other fields as needed to simplify
|
|
// integration in your engine. The type has to be described within the macro (you can either declare the struct or use a typedef). This is because ImVec2/ImU32
|
|
// are likely not declared at the time you'd want to set your type up. NOTE: IMGUI DOESN'T CLEAR THE STRUCTURE AND DOESN'T CALL A CONSTRUCTOR SO ANY CUSTOM
|
|
// FIELD WILL BE UNINITIALIZED. IF YOU ADD EXTRA FIELDS (SUCH AS A 'Z' COORDINATES) YOU WILL NEED TO CLEAR THEM DURING RENDER OR TO IGNORE THEM.
|
|
IMGUI_OVERRIDE_DRAWVERT_STRUCT_LAYOUT;
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] For use by ImDrawList
|
|
struct ImDrawCmdHeader {
|
|
ImVec4 ClipRect;
|
|
ImTextureID TextureId;
|
|
unsigned int VtxOffset;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] For use by ImDrawListSplitter
|
|
struct ImDrawChannel {
|
|
ImVector<ImDrawCmd> _CmdBuffer;
|
|
ImVector<ImDrawIdx> _IdxBuffer;
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Split/Merge functions are used to split the draw list into different layers which can be drawn into out of order.
|
|
// This is used by the Columns/Tables API, so items of each column can be batched together in a same draw call.
|
|
struct ImDrawListSplitter {
|
|
int _Current; // Current channel number (0)
|
|
int _Count; // Number of active channels (1+)
|
|
ImVector<ImDrawChannel> _Channels; // Draw channels (not resized down so _Count might be < Channels.Size)
|
|
|
|
inline ImDrawListSplitter()
|
|
{
|
|
memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
|
|
}
|
|
inline ~ImDrawListSplitter()
|
|
{
|
|
ClearFreeMemory();
|
|
}
|
|
inline void Clear()
|
|
{
|
|
_Current = 0;
|
|
_Count = 1;
|
|
} // Do not clear Channels[] so our allocations are reused next frame
|
|
IMGUI_API void ClearFreeMemory();
|
|
IMGUI_API void Split(ImDrawList *draw_list, int count);
|
|
IMGUI_API void Merge(ImDrawList *draw_list);
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetCurrentChannel(ImDrawList *draw_list, int channel_idx);
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImDrawList functions
|
|
// (Legacy: bit 0 must always correspond to ImDrawFlags_Closed to be backward compatible with old API using a bool. Bits 1..3 must be unused)
|
|
enum ImDrawFlags_ {
|
|
ImDrawFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImDrawFlags_Closed = 1 << 0, // PathStroke(), AddPolyline(): specify that shape should be closed (Important: this is always == 1 for legacy reason)
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft =
|
|
1 << 4, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): enable rounding top-left corner only (when rounding > 0.0f, we default to all corners). Was 0x01.
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight =
|
|
1 << 5, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): enable rounding top-right corner only (when rounding > 0.0f, we default to all corners). Was 0x02.
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft =
|
|
1 << 6, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): enable rounding bottom-left corner only (when rounding > 0.0f, we default to all corners). Was 0x04.
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight =
|
|
1 << 7, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): enable rounding bottom-right corner only (when rounding > 0.0f, we default to all corners). Wax 0x08.
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone =
|
|
1 << 8, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): disable rounding on all corners (when rounding > 0.0f). This is NOT zero, NOT an implicit flag!
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTop = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight,
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottom = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight,
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersLeft = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft,
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersRight = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight,
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll =
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight,
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersDefault_ = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll, // Default to ALL corners if none of the _RoundCornersXX flags are specified.
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersMask_ = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone,
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImDrawList instance. Those are set automatically by ImGui:: functions from ImGuiIO settings, and generally not manipulated directly.
|
|
// It is however possible to temporarily alter flags between calls to ImDrawList:: functions.
|
|
enum ImDrawListFlags_ {
|
|
ImDrawListFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines = 1 << 0, // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders (*2 the number of triangles for 1.0f wide line or lines thin enough to be
|
|
// drawn using textures, otherwise *3 the number of triangles)
|
|
ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLinesUseTex = 1 << 1, // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders using textures when possible. Require backend to render with bilinear
|
|
// filtering (NOT point/nearest filtering).
|
|
ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill = 1 << 2, // Enable anti-aliased edge around filled shapes (rounded rectangles, circles).
|
|
ImDrawListFlags_AllowVtxOffset = 1 << 3, // Can emit 'VtxOffset > 0' to allow large meshes. Set when 'ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset' is enabled.
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Draw command list
|
|
// This is the low-level list of polygons that ImGui:: functions are filling. At the end of the frame,
|
|
// all command lists are passed to your ImGuiIO::RenderDrawListFn function for rendering.
|
|
// Each dear imgui window contains its own ImDrawList. You can use ImGui::GetWindowDrawList() to
|
|
// access the current window draw list and draw custom primitives.
|
|
// You can interleave normal ImGui:: calls and adding primitives to the current draw list.
|
|
// In single viewport mode, top-left is == GetMainViewport()->Pos (generally 0,0), bottom-right is == GetMainViewport()->Pos+Size (generally io.DisplaySize).
|
|
// You are totally free to apply whatever transformation matrix to want to the data (depending on the use of the transformation you may want to apply it to
|
|
// ClipRect as well!) Important: Primitives are always added to the list and not culled (culling is done at higher-level by ImGui:: functions), if you use this
|
|
// API a lot consider coarse culling your drawn objects.
|
|
struct ImDrawList {
|
|
// This is what you have to render
|
|
ImVector<ImDrawCmd> CmdBuffer; // Draw commands. Typically 1 command = 1 GPU draw call, unless the command is a callback.
|
|
ImVector<ImDrawIdx> IdxBuffer; // Index buffer. Each command consume ImDrawCmd::ElemCount of those
|
|
ImVector<ImDrawVert> VtxBuffer; // Vertex buffer.
|
|
ImDrawListFlags Flags; // Flags, you may poke into these to adjust anti-aliasing settings per-primitive.
|
|
|
|
// [Internal, used while building lists]
|
|
unsigned int _VtxCurrentIdx; // [Internal] generally == VtxBuffer.Size unless we are past 64K vertices, in which case this gets reset to 0.
|
|
ImDrawListSharedData *_Data; // Pointer to shared draw data (you can use ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData() to get the one from current ImGui context)
|
|
const char *_OwnerName; // Pointer to owner window's name for debugging
|
|
ImDrawVert *_VtxWritePtr; // [Internal] point within VtxBuffer.Data after each add command (to avoid using the ImVector<> operators too much)
|
|
ImDrawIdx *_IdxWritePtr; // [Internal] point within IdxBuffer.Data after each add command (to avoid using the ImVector<> operators too much)
|
|
ImVector<ImVec4> _ClipRectStack; // [Internal]
|
|
ImVector<ImTextureID> _TextureIdStack; // [Internal]
|
|
ImVector<ImVec2> _Path; // [Internal] current path building
|
|
ImDrawCmdHeader _CmdHeader; // [Internal] template of active commands. Fields should match those of CmdBuffer.back().
|
|
ImDrawListSplitter _Splitter; // [Internal] for channels api (note: prefer using your own persistent instance of ImDrawListSplitter!)
|
|
float _FringeScale; // [Internal] anti-alias fringe is scaled by this value, this helps to keep things sharp while zooming at vertex buffer content
|
|
|
|
// If you want to create ImDrawList instances, pass them ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData() or create and use your own ImDrawListSharedData (so you can use
|
|
// ImDrawList without ImGui)
|
|
ImDrawList(ImDrawListSharedData *shared_data)
|
|
{
|
|
memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
|
|
_Data = shared_data;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
~ImDrawList()
|
|
{
|
|
_ClearFreeMemory();
|
|
}
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushClipRect(const ImVec2 &clip_rect_min,
|
|
const ImVec2 &clip_rect_max,
|
|
bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect =
|
|
false); // Render-level scissoring. This is passed down to your render function but not used for CPU-side coarse clipping.
|
|
// Prefer using higher-level ImGui::PushClipRect() to affect logic (hit-testing and widget culling)
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushClipRectFullScreen();
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopClipRect();
|
|
IMGUI_API void PushTextureID(ImTextureID texture_id);
|
|
IMGUI_API void PopTextureID();
|
|
inline ImVec2 GetClipRectMin() const
|
|
{
|
|
const ImVec4 &cr = _ClipRectStack.back();
|
|
return ImVec2(cr.x, cr.y);
|
|
}
|
|
inline ImVec2 GetClipRectMax() const
|
|
{
|
|
const ImVec4 &cr = _ClipRectStack.back();
|
|
return ImVec2(cr.z, cr.w);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Primitives
|
|
// - Filled shapes must always use clockwise winding order. The anti-aliasing fringe depends on it. Counter-clockwise shapes will have "inward"
|
|
// anti-aliasing.
|
|
// - For rectangular primitives, "p_min" and "p_max" represent the upper-left and lower-right corners.
|
|
// - For circle primitives, use "num_segments == 0" to automatically calculate tessellation (preferred).
|
|
// In older versions (until Dear ImGui 1.77) the AddCircle functions defaulted to num_segments == 12.
|
|
// In future versions we will use textures to provide cheaper and higher-quality circles.
|
|
// Use AddNgon() and AddNgonFilled() functions if you need to guarantee a specific number of sides.
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddLine(const ImVec2 &p1, const ImVec2 &p2, ImU32 col, float thickness = 1.0f);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddRect(const ImVec2 &p_min,
|
|
const ImVec2 &p_max,
|
|
ImU32 col,
|
|
float rounding = 0.0f,
|
|
ImDrawFlags flags = 0,
|
|
float thickness = 1.0f); // a: upper-left, b: lower-right (== upper-left + size)
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddRectFilled(const ImVec2 &p_min,
|
|
const ImVec2 &p_max,
|
|
ImU32 col,
|
|
float rounding = 0.0f,
|
|
ImDrawFlags flags = 0); // a: upper-left, b: lower-right (== upper-left + size)
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
AddRectFilledMultiColor(const ImVec2 &p_min, const ImVec2 &p_max, ImU32 col_upr_left, ImU32 col_upr_right, ImU32 col_bot_right, ImU32 col_bot_left);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddQuad(const ImVec2 &p1, const ImVec2 &p2, const ImVec2 &p3, const ImVec2 &p4, ImU32 col, float thickness = 1.0f);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddQuadFilled(const ImVec2 &p1, const ImVec2 &p2, const ImVec2 &p3, const ImVec2 &p4, ImU32 col);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddTriangle(const ImVec2 &p1, const ImVec2 &p2, const ImVec2 &p3, ImU32 col, float thickness = 1.0f);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddTriangleFilled(const ImVec2 &p1, const ImVec2 &p2, const ImVec2 &p3, ImU32 col);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddCircle(const ImVec2 ¢er, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments = 0, float thickness = 1.0f);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddCircleFilled(const ImVec2 ¢er, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddNgon(const ImVec2 ¢er, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments, float thickness = 1.0f);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddNgonFilled(const ImVec2 ¢er, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddText(const ImVec2 &pos, ImU32 col, const char *text_begin, const char *text_end = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddText(const ImFont *font,
|
|
float font_size,
|
|
const ImVec2 &pos,
|
|
ImU32 col,
|
|
const char *text_begin,
|
|
const char *text_end = NULL,
|
|
float wrap_width = 0.0f,
|
|
const ImVec4 *cpu_fine_clip_rect = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddPolyline(const ImVec2 *points, int num_points, ImU32 col, ImDrawFlags flags, float thickness);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddConvexPolyFilled(const ImVec2 *points, int num_points, ImU32 col);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddBezierCubic(const ImVec2 &p1,
|
|
const ImVec2 &p2,
|
|
const ImVec2 &p3,
|
|
const ImVec2 &p4,
|
|
ImU32 col,
|
|
float thickness,
|
|
int num_segments = 0); // Cubic Bezier (4 control points)
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddBezierQuadratic(const ImVec2 &p1,
|
|
const ImVec2 &p2,
|
|
const ImVec2 &p3,
|
|
ImU32 col,
|
|
float thickness,
|
|
int num_segments = 0); // Quadratic Bezier (3 control points)
|
|
|
|
// Image primitives
|
|
// - Read FAQ to understand what ImTextureID is.
|
|
// - "p_min" and "p_max" represent the upper-left and lower-right corners of the rectangle.
|
|
// - "uv_min" and "uv_max" represent the normalized texture coordinates to use for those corners. Using (0,0)->(1,1) texture coordinates will generally
|
|
// display the entire texture.
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddImage(ImTextureID user_texture_id,
|
|
const ImVec2 &p_min,
|
|
const ImVec2 &p_max,
|
|
const ImVec2 &uv_min = ImVec2(0, 0),
|
|
const ImVec2 &uv_max = ImVec2(1, 1),
|
|
ImU32 col = IM_COL32_WHITE);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddImageQuad(ImTextureID user_texture_id,
|
|
const ImVec2 &p1,
|
|
const ImVec2 &p2,
|
|
const ImVec2 &p3,
|
|
const ImVec2 &p4,
|
|
const ImVec2 &uv1 = ImVec2(0, 0),
|
|
const ImVec2 &uv2 = ImVec2(1, 0),
|
|
const ImVec2 &uv3 = ImVec2(1, 1),
|
|
const ImVec2 &uv4 = ImVec2(0, 1),
|
|
ImU32 col = IM_COL32_WHITE);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddImageRounded(ImTextureID user_texture_id,
|
|
const ImVec2 &p_min,
|
|
const ImVec2 &p_max,
|
|
const ImVec2 &uv_min,
|
|
const ImVec2 &uv_max,
|
|
ImU32 col,
|
|
float rounding,
|
|
ImDrawFlags flags = 0);
|
|
|
|
// Stateful path API, add points then finish with PathFillConvex() or PathStroke()
|
|
// - Filled shapes must always use clockwise winding order. The anti-aliasing fringe depends on it. Counter-clockwise shapes will have "inward"
|
|
// anti-aliasing.
|
|
inline void PathClear()
|
|
{
|
|
_Path.Size = 0;
|
|
}
|
|
inline void PathLineTo(const ImVec2 &pos)
|
|
{
|
|
_Path.push_back(pos);
|
|
}
|
|
inline void PathLineToMergeDuplicate(const ImVec2 &pos)
|
|
{
|
|
if (_Path.Size == 0 || memcmp(&_Path.Data[_Path.Size - 1], &pos, 8) != 0)
|
|
_Path.push_back(pos);
|
|
}
|
|
inline void PathFillConvex(ImU32 col)
|
|
{
|
|
AddConvexPolyFilled(_Path.Data, _Path.Size, col);
|
|
_Path.Size = 0;
|
|
}
|
|
inline void PathStroke(ImU32 col, ImDrawFlags flags = 0, float thickness = 1.0f)
|
|
{
|
|
AddPolyline(_Path.Data, _Path.Size, col, flags, thickness);
|
|
_Path.Size = 0;
|
|
}
|
|
IMGUI_API void PathArcTo(const ImVec2 ¢er, float radius, float a_min, float a_max, int num_segments = 0);
|
|
IMGUI_API void PathArcToFast(const ImVec2 ¢er, float radius, int a_min_of_12, int a_max_of_12); // Use precomputed angles for a 12 steps circle
|
|
IMGUI_API void PathBezierCubicCurveTo(const ImVec2 &p2, const ImVec2 &p3, const ImVec2 &p4, int num_segments = 0); // Cubic Bezier (4 control points)
|
|
IMGUI_API void PathBezierQuadraticCurveTo(const ImVec2 &p2, const ImVec2 &p3, int num_segments = 0); // Quadratic Bezier (3 control points)
|
|
IMGUI_API void PathRect(const ImVec2 &rect_min, const ImVec2 &rect_max, float rounding = 0.0f, ImDrawFlags flags = 0);
|
|
|
|
// Advanced
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddCallback(
|
|
ImDrawCallback callback,
|
|
void *callback_data); // Your rendering function must check for 'UserCallback' in ImDrawCmd and call the function instead of rendering triangles.
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddDrawCmd(); // This is useful if you need to forcefully create a new draw call (to allow for dependent rendering / blending). Otherwise
|
|
// primitives are merged into the same draw-call as much as possible
|
|
IMGUI_API ImDrawList *CloneOutput() const; // Create a clone of the CmdBuffer/IdxBuffer/VtxBuffer.
|
|
|
|
// Advanced: Channels
|
|
// - Use to split render into layers. By switching channels to can render out-of-order (e.g. submit FG primitives before BG primitives)
|
|
// - Use to minimize draw calls (e.g. if going back-and-forth between multiple clipping rectangles, prefer to append into separate channels then merge at
|
|
// the end)
|
|
// - This API shouldn't have been in ImDrawList in the first place!
|
|
// Prefer using your own persistent instance of ImDrawListSplitter as you can stack them.
|
|
// Using the ImDrawList::ChannelsXXXX you cannot stack a split over another.
|
|
inline void ChannelsSplit(int count)
|
|
{
|
|
_Splitter.Split(this, count);
|
|
}
|
|
inline void ChannelsMerge()
|
|
{
|
|
_Splitter.Merge(this);
|
|
}
|
|
inline void ChannelsSetCurrent(int n)
|
|
{
|
|
_Splitter.SetCurrentChannel(this, n);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Advanced: Primitives allocations
|
|
// - We render triangles (three vertices)
|
|
// - All primitives needs to be reserved via PrimReserve() beforehand.
|
|
IMGUI_API void PrimReserve(int idx_count, int vtx_count);
|
|
IMGUI_API void PrimUnreserve(int idx_count, int vtx_count);
|
|
IMGUI_API void PrimRect(const ImVec2 &a, const ImVec2 &b, ImU32 col); // Axis aligned rectangle (composed of two triangles)
|
|
IMGUI_API void PrimRectUV(const ImVec2 &a, const ImVec2 &b, const ImVec2 &uv_a, const ImVec2 &uv_b, ImU32 col);
|
|
IMGUI_API void PrimQuadUV(const ImVec2 &a,
|
|
const ImVec2 &b,
|
|
const ImVec2 &c,
|
|
const ImVec2 &d,
|
|
const ImVec2 &uv_a,
|
|
const ImVec2 &uv_b,
|
|
const ImVec2 &uv_c,
|
|
const ImVec2 &uv_d,
|
|
ImU32 col);
|
|
inline void PrimWriteVtx(const ImVec2 &pos, const ImVec2 &uv, ImU32 col)
|
|
{
|
|
_VtxWritePtr->pos = pos;
|
|
_VtxWritePtr->uv = uv;
|
|
_VtxWritePtr->col = col;
|
|
_VtxWritePtr++;
|
|
_VtxCurrentIdx++;
|
|
}
|
|
inline void PrimWriteIdx(ImDrawIdx idx)
|
|
{
|
|
*_IdxWritePtr = idx;
|
|
_IdxWritePtr++;
|
|
}
|
|
inline void PrimVtx(const ImVec2 &pos, const ImVec2 &uv, ImU32 col)
|
|
{
|
|
PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)_VtxCurrentIdx);
|
|
PrimWriteVtx(pos, uv, col);
|
|
} // Write vertex with unique index
|
|
|
|
// Obsolete names
|
|
// inline void AddBezierCurve(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col, float thickness, int num_segments = 0) {
|
|
// AddBezierCubic(p1, p2, p3, p4, col, thickness, num_segments); } // OBSOLETED in 1.80 (Jan 2021) inline void PathBezierCurveTo(const ImVec2& p2, const
|
|
// ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, int num_segments = 0) { PathBezierCubicCurveTo(p2, p3, p4, num_segments); } // OBSOLETED in 1.80 (Jan 2021)
|
|
|
|
// [Internal helpers]
|
|
IMGUI_API void _ResetForNewFrame();
|
|
IMGUI_API void _ClearFreeMemory();
|
|
IMGUI_API void _PopUnusedDrawCmd();
|
|
IMGUI_API void _TryMergeDrawCmds();
|
|
IMGUI_API void _OnChangedClipRect();
|
|
IMGUI_API void _OnChangedTextureID();
|
|
IMGUI_API void _OnChangedVtxOffset();
|
|
IMGUI_API int _CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(float radius) const;
|
|
IMGUI_API void _PathArcToFastEx(const ImVec2 ¢er, float radius, int a_min_sample, int a_max_sample, int a_step);
|
|
IMGUI_API void _PathArcToN(const ImVec2 ¢er, float radius, float a_min, float a_max, int num_segments);
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// All draw data to render a Dear ImGui frame
|
|
// (NB: the style and the naming convention here is a little inconsistent, we currently preserve them for backward compatibility purpose,
|
|
// as this is one of the oldest structure exposed by the library! Basically, ImDrawList == CmdList)
|
|
struct ImDrawData {
|
|
bool Valid; // Only valid after Render() is called and before the next NewFrame() is called.
|
|
int CmdListsCount; // Number of ImDrawList* to render (should always be == CmdLists.size)
|
|
int TotalIdxCount; // For convenience, sum of all ImDrawList's IdxBuffer.Size
|
|
int TotalVtxCount; // For convenience, sum of all ImDrawList's VtxBuffer.Size
|
|
ImVector<ImDrawList *> CmdLists; // Array of ImDrawList* to render. The ImDrawLists are owned by ImGuiContext and only pointed to from here.
|
|
ImVec2 DisplayPos; // Top-left position of the viewport to render (== top-left of the orthogonal projection matrix to use) (== GetMainViewport()->Pos for
|
|
// the main viewport, == (0.0) in most single-viewport applications)
|
|
ImVec2 DisplaySize; // Size of the viewport to render (== GetMainViewport()->Size for the main viewport, == io.DisplaySize in most single-viewport
|
|
// applications)
|
|
ImVec2 FramebufferScale; // Amount of pixels for each unit of DisplaySize. Based on io.DisplayFramebufferScale. Generally (1,1) on normal display, (2,2) on
|
|
// OSX with Retina display.
|
|
ImGuiViewport *OwnerViewport; // Viewport carrying the ImDrawData instance, might be of use to the renderer (generally not).
|
|
|
|
// Functions
|
|
ImDrawData()
|
|
{
|
|
Clear();
|
|
}
|
|
IMGUI_API void Clear();
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddDrawList(ImDrawList *draw_list); // Helper to add an external draw list into an existing ImDrawData.
|
|
IMGUI_API void DeIndexAllBuffers(); // Helper to convert all buffers from indexed to non-indexed, in case you cannot render indexed. Note: this is slow and
|
|
// most likely a waste of resources. Always prefer indexed rendering!
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
ScaleClipRects(const ImVec2 &fb_scale); // Helper to scale the ClipRect field of each ImDrawCmd. Use if your final output buffer is at a different scale
|
|
// than Dear ImGui expects, or if there is a difference between your window resolution and framebuffer resolution.
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Font API (ImFontConfig, ImFontGlyph, ImFontAtlasFlags, ImFontAtlas, ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder, ImFont)
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
struct ImFontConfig {
|
|
void *FontData; // // TTF/OTF data
|
|
int FontDataSize; // // TTF/OTF data size
|
|
bool FontDataOwnedByAtlas; // true // TTF/OTF data ownership taken by the container ImFontAtlas (will delete memory itself).
|
|
int FontNo; // 0 // Index of font within TTF/OTF file
|
|
float SizePixels; // // Size in pixels for rasterizer (more or less maps to the resulting font height).
|
|
int OversampleH; // 2 // Rasterize at higher quality for sub-pixel positioning. Note the difference between 2 and 3 is minimal. You can reduce this
|
|
// to 1 for large glyphs save memory. Read https://github.com/nothings/stb/blob/master/tests/oversample/README.md for details.
|
|
int OversampleV; // 1 // Rasterize at higher quality for sub-pixel positioning. This is not really useful as we don't use sub-pixel positions on the
|
|
// Y axis.
|
|
bool PixelSnapH; // false // Align every glyph to pixel boundary. Useful e.g. if you are merging a non-pixel aligned font with the default font. If
|
|
// enabled, you can set OversampleH/V to 1.
|
|
ImVec2 GlyphExtraSpacing; // 0, 0 // Extra spacing (in pixels) between glyphs. Only X axis is supported for now.
|
|
ImVec2 GlyphOffset; // 0, 0 // Offset all glyphs from this font input.
|
|
const ImWchar *GlyphRanges; // NULL // THE ARRAY DATA NEEDS TO PERSIST AS LONG AS THE FONT IS ALIVE. Pointer to a user-provided list of Unicode range (2
|
|
// value per range, values are inclusive, zero-terminated list).
|
|
float GlyphMinAdvanceX; // 0 // Minimum AdvanceX for glyphs, set Min to align font icons, set both Min/Max to enforce mono-space font
|
|
float GlyphMaxAdvanceX; // FLT_MAX // Maximum AdvanceX for glyphs
|
|
bool MergeMode; // false // Merge into previous ImFont, so you can combine multiple inputs font into one ImFont (e.g. ASCII font + icons + Japanese
|
|
// glyphs). You may want to use GlyphOffset.y when merge font of different heights.
|
|
unsigned int FontBuilderFlags; // 0 // Settings for custom font builder. THIS IS BUILDER IMPLEMENTATION DEPENDENT. Leave as zero if unsure.
|
|
float RasterizerMultiply; // 1.0f // Brighten (>1.0f) or darken (<1.0f) font output. Brightening small fonts may be a good workaround to make them more
|
|
// readable.
|
|
ImWchar EllipsisChar; // -1 // Explicitly specify unicode codepoint of ellipsis character. When fonts are being merged first specified ellipsis will
|
|
// be used.
|
|
|
|
// [Internal]
|
|
char Name[40]; // Name (strictly to ease debugging)
|
|
ImFont *DstFont;
|
|
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFontConfig();
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Hold rendering data for one glyph.
|
|
// (Note: some language parsers may fail to convert the 31+1 bitfield members, in this case maybe drop store a single u32 or we can rework this)
|
|
struct ImFontGlyph {
|
|
unsigned int Colored : 1; // Flag to indicate glyph is colored and should generally ignore tinting (make it usable with no shift on little-endian as this is
|
|
// used in loops)
|
|
unsigned int Visible : 1; // Flag to indicate glyph has no visible pixels (e.g. space). Allow early out when rendering.
|
|
unsigned int Codepoint : 30; // 0x0000..0x10FFFF
|
|
float AdvanceX; // Distance to next character (= data from font + ImFontConfig::GlyphExtraSpacing.x baked in)
|
|
float X0, Y0, X1, Y1; // Glyph corners
|
|
float U0, V0, U1, V1; // Texture coordinates
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Helper to build glyph ranges from text/string data. Feed your application strings/characters to it then call BuildRanges().
|
|
// This is essentially a tightly packed of vector of 64k booleans = 8KB storage.
|
|
struct ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder {
|
|
ImVector<ImU32> UsedChars; // Store 1-bit per Unicode code point (0=unused, 1=used)
|
|
|
|
ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder()
|
|
{
|
|
Clear();
|
|
}
|
|
inline void Clear()
|
|
{
|
|
int size_in_bytes = (IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX + 1) / 8;
|
|
UsedChars.resize(size_in_bytes / (int)sizeof(ImU32));
|
|
memset(UsedChars.Data, 0, (size_t)size_in_bytes);
|
|
}
|
|
inline bool GetBit(size_t n) const
|
|
{
|
|
int off = (int)(n >> 5);
|
|
ImU32 mask = 1u << (n & 31);
|
|
return (UsedChars[off] & mask) != 0;
|
|
} // Get bit n in the array
|
|
inline void SetBit(size_t n)
|
|
{
|
|
int off = (int)(n >> 5);
|
|
ImU32 mask = 1u << (n & 31);
|
|
UsedChars[off] |= mask;
|
|
} // Set bit n in the array
|
|
inline void AddChar(ImWchar c)
|
|
{
|
|
SetBit(c);
|
|
} // Add character
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddText(const char *text, const char *text_end = NULL); // Add string (each character of the UTF-8 string are added)
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
AddRanges(const ImWchar *ranges); // Add ranges, e.g. builder.AddRanges(ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesDefault()) to force add all of ASCII/Latin+Ext
|
|
IMGUI_API void BuildRanges(ImVector<ImWchar> *out_ranges); // Output new ranges
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// See ImFontAtlas::AddCustomRectXXX functions.
|
|
struct ImFontAtlasCustomRect {
|
|
unsigned short Width, Height; // Input // Desired rectangle dimension
|
|
unsigned short X, Y; // Output // Packed position in Atlas
|
|
unsigned int GlyphID; // Input // For custom font glyphs only (ID < 0x110000)
|
|
float GlyphAdvanceX; // Input // For custom font glyphs only: glyph xadvance
|
|
ImVec2 GlyphOffset; // Input // For custom font glyphs only: glyph display offset
|
|
ImFont *Font; // Input // For custom font glyphs only: target font
|
|
ImFontAtlasCustomRect()
|
|
{
|
|
Width = Height = 0;
|
|
X = Y = 0xFFFF;
|
|
GlyphID = 0;
|
|
GlyphAdvanceX = 0.0f;
|
|
GlyphOffset = ImVec2(0, 0);
|
|
Font = NULL;
|
|
}
|
|
bool IsPacked() const
|
|
{
|
|
return X != 0xFFFF;
|
|
}
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Flags for ImFontAtlas build
|
|
enum ImFontAtlasFlags_ {
|
|
ImFontAtlasFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImFontAtlasFlags_NoPowerOfTwoHeight = 1 << 0, // Don't round the height to next power of two
|
|
ImFontAtlasFlags_NoMouseCursors = 1 << 1, // Don't build software mouse cursors into the atlas (save a little texture memory)
|
|
ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines =
|
|
1 << 2, // Don't build thick line textures into the atlas (save a little texture memory, allow support for point/nearest filtering). The
|
|
// AntiAliasedLinesUseTex features uses them, otherwise they will be rendered using polygons (more expensive for CPU/GPU).
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Load and rasterize multiple TTF/OTF fonts into a same texture. The font atlas will build a single texture holding:
|
|
// - One or more fonts.
|
|
// - Custom graphics data needed to render the shapes needed by Dear ImGui.
|
|
// - Mouse cursor shapes for software cursor rendering (unless setting 'Flags |= ImFontAtlasFlags_NoMouseCursors' in the font atlas).
|
|
// It is the user-code responsibility to setup/build the atlas, then upload the pixel data into a texture accessible by your graphics api.
|
|
// - Optionally, call any of the AddFont*** functions. If you don't call any, the default font embedded in the code will be loaded for you.
|
|
// - Call GetTexDataAsAlpha8() or GetTexDataAsRGBA32() to build and retrieve pixels data.
|
|
// - Upload the pixels data into a texture within your graphics system (see imgui_impl_xxxx.cpp examples)
|
|
// - Call SetTexID(my_tex_id); and pass the pointer/identifier to your texture in a format natural to your graphics API.
|
|
// This value will be passed back to you during rendering to identify the texture. Read FAQ entry about ImTextureID for more details.
|
|
// Common pitfalls:
|
|
// - If you pass a 'glyph_ranges' array to AddFont*** functions, you need to make sure that your array persist up until the
|
|
// atlas is build (when calling GetTexData*** or Build()). We only copy the pointer, not the data.
|
|
// - Important: By default, AddFontFromMemoryTTF() takes ownership of the data. Even though we are not writing to it, we will free the pointer on destruction.
|
|
// You can set font_cfg->FontDataOwnedByAtlas=false to keep ownership of your data and it won't be freed,
|
|
// - Even though many functions are suffixed with "TTF", OTF data is supported just as well.
|
|
// - This is an old API and it is currently awkward for those and various other reasons! We will address them in the future!
|
|
struct ImFontAtlas {
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFontAtlas();
|
|
IMGUI_API ~ImFontAtlas();
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFont *AddFont(const ImFontConfig *font_cfg);
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFont *AddFontDefault(const ImFontConfig *font_cfg = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFont *AddFontFromFileTTF(const char *filename, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig *font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar *glyph_ranges = NULL);
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFont *AddFontFromMemoryTTF(
|
|
void *font_data,
|
|
int font_size,
|
|
float size_pixels,
|
|
const ImFontConfig *font_cfg = NULL,
|
|
const ImWchar *glyph_ranges = NULL); // Note: Transfer ownership of 'ttf_data' to ImFontAtlas! Will be deleted after destruction of the atlas. Set
|
|
// font_cfg->FontDataOwnedByAtlas=false to keep ownership of your data and it won't be freed.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFont *AddFontFromMemoryCompressedTTF(
|
|
const void *compressed_font_data,
|
|
int compressed_font_size,
|
|
float size_pixels,
|
|
const ImFontConfig *font_cfg = NULL,
|
|
const ImWchar *glyph_ranges = NULL); // 'compressed_font_data' still owned by caller. Compress with binary_to_compressed_c.cpp.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFont *AddFontFromMemoryCompressedBase85TTF(const char *compressed_font_data_base85,
|
|
float size_pixels,
|
|
const ImFontConfig *font_cfg = NULL,
|
|
const ImWchar *glyph_ranges = NULL); // 'compressed_font_data_base85' still owned by caller. Compress
|
|
// with binary_to_compressed_c.cpp with -base85 parameter.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ClearInputData(); // Clear input data (all ImFontConfig structures including sizes, TTF data, glyph ranges, etc.) = all the data used to
|
|
// build the texture and fonts.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ClearTexData(); // Clear output texture data (CPU side). Saves RAM once the texture has been copied to graphics memory.
|
|
IMGUI_API void ClearFonts(); // Clear output font data (glyphs storage, UV coordinates).
|
|
IMGUI_API void Clear(); // Clear all input and output.
|
|
|
|
// Build atlas, retrieve pixel data.
|
|
// User is in charge of copying the pixels into graphics memory (e.g. create a texture with your engine). Then store your texture handle with SetTexID().
|
|
// The pitch is always = Width * BytesPerPixels (1 or 4)
|
|
// Building in RGBA32 format is provided for convenience and compatibility, but note that unless you manually manipulate or copy color data into
|
|
// the texture (e.g. when using the AddCustomRect*** api), then the RGB pixels emitted will always be white (~75% of memory/bandwidth waste.
|
|
IMGUI_API bool Build(); // Build pixels data. This is called automatically for you by the GetTexData*** functions.
|
|
IMGUI_API void GetTexDataAsAlpha8(unsigned char **out_pixels, int *out_width, int *out_height, int *out_bytes_per_pixel = NULL); // 1 byte per-pixel
|
|
IMGUI_API void GetTexDataAsRGBA32(unsigned char **out_pixels, int *out_width, int *out_height, int *out_bytes_per_pixel = NULL); // 4 bytes-per-pixel
|
|
bool IsBuilt() const
|
|
{
|
|
return Fonts.Size > 0 && TexReady;
|
|
} // Bit ambiguous: used to detect when user didn't build texture but effectively we should check TexID != 0 except that would be backend dependent...
|
|
void SetTexID(ImTextureID id)
|
|
{
|
|
TexID = id;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//-------------------------------------------
|
|
// Glyph Ranges
|
|
//-------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Helpers to retrieve list of common Unicode ranges (2 value per range, values are inclusive, zero-terminated list)
|
|
// NB: Make sure that your string are UTF-8 and NOT in your local code page.
|
|
// Read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/blob/master/docs/FONTS.md/#about-utf-8-encoding for details.
|
|
// NB: Consider using ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder to build glyph ranges from textual data.
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImWchar *GetGlyphRangesDefault(); // Basic Latin, Extended Latin
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImWchar *GetGlyphRangesGreek(); // Default + Greek and Coptic
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImWchar *GetGlyphRangesKorean(); // Default + Korean characters
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImWchar *GetGlyphRangesJapanese(); // Default + Hiragana, Katakana, Half-Width, Selection of 2999 Ideographs
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImWchar *GetGlyphRangesChineseFull(); // Default + Half-Width + Japanese Hiragana/Katakana + full set of about 21000 CJK Unified Ideographs
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImWchar *GetGlyphRangesChineseSimplifiedCommon(); // Default + Half-Width + Japanese Hiragana/Katakana + set of 2500 CJK Unified Ideographs
|
|
// for common simplified Chinese
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImWchar *GetGlyphRangesCyrillic(); // Default + about 400 Cyrillic characters
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImWchar *GetGlyphRangesThai(); // Default + Thai characters
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImWchar *GetGlyphRangesVietnamese(); // Default + Vietnamese characters
|
|
|
|
//-------------------------------------------
|
|
// [BETA] Custom Rectangles/Glyphs API
|
|
//-------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// You can request arbitrary rectangles to be packed into the atlas, for your own purposes.
|
|
// - After calling Build(), you can query the rectangle position and render your pixels.
|
|
// - If you render colored output, set 'atlas->TexPixelsUseColors = true' as this may help some backends decide of prefered texture format.
|
|
// - You can also request your rectangles to be mapped as font glyph (given a font + Unicode point),
|
|
// so you can render e.g. custom colorful icons and use them as regular glyphs.
|
|
// - Read docs/FONTS.md for more details about using colorful icons.
|
|
// - Note: this API may be redesigned later in order to support multi-monitor varying DPI settings.
|
|
IMGUI_API int AddCustomRectRegular(int width, int height);
|
|
IMGUI_API int AddCustomRectFontGlyph(ImFont *font, ImWchar id, int width, int height, float advance_x, const ImVec2 &offset = ImVec2(0, 0));
|
|
ImFontAtlasCustomRect *GetCustomRectByIndex(int index)
|
|
{
|
|
IM_ASSERT(index >= 0);
|
|
return &CustomRects[index];
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// [Internal]
|
|
IMGUI_API void CalcCustomRectUV(const ImFontAtlasCustomRect *rect, ImVec2 *out_uv_min, ImVec2 *out_uv_max) const;
|
|
IMGUI_API bool GetMouseCursorTexData(ImGuiMouseCursor cursor, ImVec2 *out_offset, ImVec2 *out_size, ImVec2 out_uv_border[2], ImVec2 out_uv_fill[2]);
|
|
|
|
//-------------------------------------------
|
|
// Members
|
|
//-------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
ImFontAtlasFlags Flags; // Build flags (see ImFontAtlasFlags_)
|
|
ImTextureID TexID; // User data to refer to the texture once it has been uploaded to user's graphic systems. It is passed back to you during rendering via
|
|
// the ImDrawCmd structure.
|
|
int TexDesiredWidth; // Texture width desired by user before Build(). Must be a power-of-two. If have many glyphs your graphics API have texture size
|
|
// restrictions you may want to increase texture width to decrease height.
|
|
int TexGlyphPadding; // Padding between glyphs within texture in pixels. Defaults to 1. If your rendering method doesn't rely on bilinear filtering you may
|
|
// set this to 0 (will also need to set AntiAliasedLinesUseTex = false).
|
|
bool Locked; // Marked as Locked by ImGui::NewFrame() so attempt to modify the atlas will assert.
|
|
void *UserData; // Store your own atlas related user-data (if e.g. you have multiple font atlas).
|
|
|
|
// [Internal]
|
|
// NB: Access texture data via GetTexData*() calls! Which will setup a default font for you.
|
|
bool TexReady; // Set when texture was built matching current font input
|
|
bool TexPixelsUseColors; // Tell whether our texture data is known to use colors (rather than just alpha channel), in order to help backend select a format.
|
|
unsigned char *TexPixelsAlpha8; // 1 component per pixel, each component is unsigned 8-bit. Total size = TexWidth * TexHeight
|
|
unsigned int *TexPixelsRGBA32; // 4 component per pixel, each component is unsigned 8-bit. Total size = TexWidth * TexHeight * 4
|
|
int TexWidth; // Texture width calculated during Build().
|
|
int TexHeight; // Texture height calculated during Build().
|
|
ImVec2 TexUvScale; // = (1.0f/TexWidth, 1.0f/TexHeight)
|
|
ImVec2 TexUvWhitePixel; // Texture coordinates to a white pixel
|
|
ImVector<ImFont *> Fonts; // Hold all the fonts returned by AddFont*. Fonts[0] is the default font upon calling ImGui::NewFrame(), use
|
|
// ImGui::PushFont()/PopFont() to change the current font.
|
|
ImVector<ImFontAtlasCustomRect> CustomRects; // Rectangles for packing custom texture data into the atlas.
|
|
ImVector<ImFontConfig> ConfigData; // Configuration data
|
|
ImVec4 TexUvLines[IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX + 1]; // UVs for baked anti-aliased lines
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] Font builder
|
|
const ImFontBuilderIO
|
|
*FontBuilderIO; // Opaque interface to a font builder (default to stb_truetype, can be changed to use FreeType by defining IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE).
|
|
unsigned int FontBuilderFlags; // Shared flags (for all fonts) for custom font builder. THIS IS BUILD IMPLEMENTATION DEPENDENT. Per-font override is also
|
|
// available in ImFontConfig.
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] Packing data
|
|
int PackIdMouseCursors; // Custom texture rectangle ID for white pixel and mouse cursors
|
|
int PackIdLines; // Custom texture rectangle ID for baked anti-aliased lines
|
|
|
|
// [Obsolete]
|
|
// typedef ImFontAtlasCustomRect CustomRect; // OBSOLETED in 1.72+
|
|
// typedef ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder GlyphRangesBuilder; // OBSOLETED in 1.67+
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// Font runtime data and rendering
|
|
// ImFontAtlas automatically loads a default embedded font for you when you call GetTexDataAsAlpha8() or GetTexDataAsRGBA32().
|
|
struct ImFont {
|
|
// Members: Hot ~20/24 bytes (for CalcTextSize)
|
|
ImVector<float> IndexAdvanceX; // 12-16 // out // // Sparse. Glyphs->AdvanceX in a directly indexable way (cache-friendly for CalcTextSize
|
|
// functions which only this this info, and are often bottleneck in large UI).
|
|
float FallbackAdvanceX; // 4 // out // = FallbackGlyph->AdvanceX
|
|
float FontSize; // 4 // in // // Height of characters/line, set during loading (don't change after loading)
|
|
|
|
// Members: Hot ~28/40 bytes (for CalcTextSize + render loop)
|
|
ImVector<ImWchar> IndexLookup; // 12-16 // out // // Sparse. Index glyphs by Unicode code-point.
|
|
ImVector<ImFontGlyph> Glyphs; // 12-16 // out // // All glyphs.
|
|
const ImFontGlyph *FallbackGlyph; // 4-8 // out // = FindGlyph(FontFallbackChar)
|
|
|
|
// Members: Cold ~32/40 bytes
|
|
ImFontAtlas *ContainerAtlas; // 4-8 // out // // What we has been loaded into
|
|
const ImFontConfig *ConfigData; // 4-8 // in // // Pointer within ContainerAtlas->ConfigData
|
|
short ConfigDataCount; // 2 // in // ~ 1 // Number of ImFontConfig involved in creating this font. Bigger than 1 when merging multiple font
|
|
// sources into one ImFont.
|
|
ImWchar FallbackChar; // 2 // out // = FFFD/'?' // Character used if a glyph isn't found.
|
|
ImWchar EllipsisChar; // 2 // out // = '...'/'.'// Character used for ellipsis rendering.
|
|
short EllipsisCharCount; // 1 // out // 1 or 3
|
|
float EllipsisWidth; // 4 // out // Width
|
|
float EllipsisCharStep; // 4 // out // Step between characters when EllipsisCount > 0
|
|
bool DirtyLookupTables; // 1 // out //
|
|
float Scale; // 4 // in // = 1.f // Base font scale, multiplied by the per-window font scale which you can adjust with SetWindowFontScale()
|
|
float Ascent, Descent; // 4+4 // out // // Ascent: distance from top to bottom of e.g. 'A' [0..FontSize]
|
|
int MetricsTotalSurface; // 4 // out // // Total surface in pixels to get an idea of the font rasterization/texture cost (not exact, we
|
|
// approximate the cost of padding between glyphs)
|
|
ImU8 Used4kPagesMap[(IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX + 1) / 4096
|
|
/ 8]; // 2 bytes if ImWchar=ImWchar16, 34 bytes if ImWchar==ImWchar32. Store 1-bit for each block of 4K codepoints that has one active
|
|
// glyph. This is mainly used to facilitate iterations across all used codepoints.
|
|
|
|
// Methods
|
|
IMGUI_API ImFont();
|
|
IMGUI_API ~ImFont();
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImFontGlyph *FindGlyph(ImWchar c) const;
|
|
IMGUI_API const ImFontGlyph *FindGlyphNoFallback(ImWchar c) const;
|
|
float GetCharAdvance(ImWchar c) const
|
|
{
|
|
return ((int)c < IndexAdvanceX.Size) ? IndexAdvanceX[(int)c] : FallbackAdvanceX;
|
|
}
|
|
bool IsLoaded() const
|
|
{
|
|
return ContainerAtlas != NULL;
|
|
}
|
|
const char *GetDebugName() const
|
|
{
|
|
return ConfigData ? ConfigData->Name : "<unknown>";
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// 'max_width' stops rendering after a certain width (could be turned into a 2d size). FLT_MAX to disable.
|
|
// 'wrap_width' enable automatic word-wrapping across multiple lines to fit into given width. 0.0f to disable.
|
|
IMGUI_API ImVec2 CalcTextSizeA(float size,
|
|
float max_width,
|
|
float wrap_width,
|
|
const char *text_begin,
|
|
const char *text_end = NULL,
|
|
const char **remaining = NULL) const; // utf8
|
|
IMGUI_API const char *CalcWordWrapPositionA(float scale, const char *text, const char *text_end, float wrap_width) const;
|
|
IMGUI_API void RenderChar(ImDrawList *draw_list, float size, const ImVec2 &pos, ImU32 col, ImWchar c) const;
|
|
IMGUI_API void RenderText(ImDrawList *draw_list,
|
|
float size,
|
|
const ImVec2 &pos,
|
|
ImU32 col,
|
|
const ImVec4 &clip_rect,
|
|
const char *text_begin,
|
|
const char *text_end,
|
|
float wrap_width = 0.0f,
|
|
bool cpu_fine_clip = false) const;
|
|
|
|
// [Internal] Don't use!
|
|
IMGUI_API void BuildLookupTable();
|
|
IMGUI_API void ClearOutputData();
|
|
IMGUI_API void GrowIndex(int new_size);
|
|
IMGUI_API void
|
|
AddGlyph(const ImFontConfig *src_cfg, ImWchar c, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1, float u0, float v0, float u1, float v1, float advance_x);
|
|
IMGUI_API void AddRemapChar(
|
|
ImWchar dst,
|
|
ImWchar src,
|
|
bool overwrite_dst = true); // Makes 'dst' character/glyph points to 'src' character/glyph. Currently needs to be called AFTER fonts have been built.
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetGlyphVisible(ImWchar c, bool visible);
|
|
IMGUI_API bool IsGlyphRangeUnused(unsigned int c_begin, unsigned int c_last);
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Viewports
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// Flags stored in ImGuiViewport::Flags, giving indications to the platform backends.
|
|
enum ImGuiViewportFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags_IsPlatformWindow = 1 << 0, // Represent a Platform Window
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags_IsPlatformMonitor = 1 << 1, // Represent a Platform Monitor (unused yet)
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags_OwnedByApp = 1 << 2, // Platform Window: is created/managed by the application (rather than a dear imgui backend)
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// - Currently represents the Platform Window created by the application which is hosting our Dear ImGui windows.
|
|
// - In 'docking' branch with multi-viewport enabled, we extend this concept to have multiple active viewports.
|
|
// - In the future we will extend this concept further to also represent Platform Monitor and support a "no main platform window" operation mode.
|
|
// - About Main Area vs Work Area:
|
|
// - Main Area = entire viewport.
|
|
// - Work Area = entire viewport minus sections used by main menu bars (for platform windows), or by task bar (for platform monitor).
|
|
// - Windows are generally trying to stay within the Work Area of their host viewport.
|
|
struct ImGuiViewport {
|
|
ImGuiViewportFlags Flags; // See ImGuiViewportFlags_
|
|
ImVec2 Pos; // Main Area: Position of the viewport (Dear ImGui coordinates are the same as OS desktop/native coordinates)
|
|
ImVec2 Size; // Main Area: Size of the viewport.
|
|
ImVec2 WorkPos; // Work Area: Position of the viewport minus task bars, menus bars, status bars (>= Pos)
|
|
ImVec2 WorkSize; // Work Area: Size of the viewport minus task bars, menu bars, status bars (<= Size)
|
|
|
|
// Platform/Backend Dependent Data
|
|
void *PlatformHandleRaw; // void* to hold lower-level, platform-native window handle (under Win32 this is expected to be a HWND, unused for other platforms)
|
|
|
|
ImGuiViewport()
|
|
{
|
|
memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Helpers
|
|
ImVec2 GetCenter() const
|
|
{
|
|
return ImVec2(Pos.x + Size.x * 0.5f, Pos.y + Size.y * 0.5f);
|
|
}
|
|
ImVec2 GetWorkCenter() const
|
|
{
|
|
return ImVec2(WorkPos.x + WorkSize.x * 0.5f, WorkPos.y + WorkSize.y * 0.5f);
|
|
}
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Platform Dependent Interfaces
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
// (Optional) Support for IME (Input Method Editor) via the io.SetPlatformImeDataFn() function.
|
|
struct ImGuiPlatformImeData {
|
|
bool WantVisible; // A widget wants the IME to be visible
|
|
ImVec2 InputPos; // Position of the input cursor
|
|
float InputLineHeight; // Line height
|
|
|
|
ImGuiPlatformImeData()
|
|
{
|
|
memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
|
|
}
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
// [SECTION] Obsolete functions and types
|
|
// (Will be removed! Read 'API BREAKING CHANGES' section in imgui.cpp for details)
|
|
// Please keep your copy of dear imgui up to date! Occasionally set '#define IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS' in imconfig.h to stay ahead.
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
namespace ImGui
|
|
{
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
|
|
IMGUI_API ImGuiKey GetKeyIndex(ImGuiKey key); // map ImGuiKey_* values into legacy native key index. == io.KeyMap[key]
|
|
#else
|
|
static inline ImGuiKey GetKeyIndex(ImGuiKey key)
|
|
{
|
|
IM_ASSERT(key >= ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN && key < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END
|
|
&& "ImGuiKey and native_index was merged together and native_index is disabled by IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO. Please switch to ImGuiKey.");
|
|
return key;
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
|
|
namespace ImGui
|
|
{
|
|
// OBSOLETED in 1.89.7 (from June 2023)
|
|
IMGUI_API void SetItemAllowOverlap(); // Use SetNextItemAllowOverlap() before item.
|
|
// OBSOLETED in 1.89.4 (from March 2023)
|
|
static inline void PushAllowKeyboardFocus(bool tab_stop)
|
|
{
|
|
PushTabStop(tab_stop);
|
|
}
|
|
static inline void PopAllowKeyboardFocus()
|
|
{
|
|
PopTabStop();
|
|
}
|
|
// OBSOLETED in 1.89 (from August 2022)
|
|
IMGUI_API bool ImageButton(ImTextureID user_texture_id,
|
|
const ImVec2 &size,
|
|
const ImVec2 &uv0 = ImVec2(0, 0),
|
|
const ImVec2 &uv1 = ImVec2(1, 1),
|
|
int frame_padding = -1,
|
|
const ImVec4 &bg_col = ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0),
|
|
const ImVec4 &tint_col = ImVec4(1, 1, 1, 1)); // Use new ImageButton() signature (explicit item id, regular FramePadding)
|
|
// OBSOLETED in 1.88 (from May 2022)
|
|
static inline void CaptureKeyboardFromApp(bool want_capture_keyboard = true)
|
|
{
|
|
SetNextFrameWantCaptureKeyboard(want_capture_keyboard);
|
|
} // Renamed as name was misleading + removed default value.
|
|
static inline void CaptureMouseFromApp(bool want_capture_mouse = true)
|
|
{
|
|
SetNextFrameWantCaptureMouse(want_capture_mouse);
|
|
} // Renamed as name was misleading + removed default value.
|
|
// OBSOLETED in 1.86 (from November 2021)
|
|
IMGUI_API void CalcListClipping(int items_count,
|
|
float items_height,
|
|
int *out_items_display_start,
|
|
int *out_items_display_end); // Calculate coarse clipping for large list of evenly sized items. Prefer using ImGuiListClipper.
|
|
// OBSOLETED in 1.85 (from August 2021)
|
|
static inline float GetWindowContentRegionWidth()
|
|
{
|
|
return GetWindowContentRegionMax().x - GetWindowContentRegionMin().x;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Some of the older obsolete names along with their replacement (commented out so they are not reported in IDE)
|
|
//-- OBSOLETED in 1.81 (from February 2021)
|
|
// static inline bool ListBoxHeader(const char* label, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)) { return BeginListBox(label, size); }
|
|
// static inline bool ListBoxHeader(const char* label, int items_count, int height_in_items = -1) { float height = GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() *
|
|
// ((height_in_items < 0 ? ImMin(items_count, 7) : height_in_items) + 0.25f) + GetStyle().FramePadding.y * 2.0f; return BeginListBox(label, ImVec2(0.0f,
|
|
// height)); } // Helper to calculate size from items_count and height_in_items static inline void ListBoxFooter() { EndListBox(); }
|
|
//-- OBSOLETED in 1.79 (from August 2020)
|
|
// static inline void OpenPopupContextItem(const char* str_id = NULL, ImGuiMouseButton mb = 1) { OpenPopupOnItemClick(str_id, mb); } // Bool return value
|
|
// removed. Use IsWindowAppearing() in BeginPopup() instead. Renamed in 1.77, renamed back in 1.79. Sorry!
|
|
//-- OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020): Old drag/sliders functions that took a 'float power > 1.0f' argument instead of ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic. See
|
|
// github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/3361 for details. IMGUI_API bool DragScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, float v_speed,
|
|
// const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f) // OBSOLETED in 1.78
|
|
// (from June 2020) IMGUI_API bool DragScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, float v_speed, const void* p_min,
|
|
// const void* p_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f); // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) IMGUI_API bool
|
|
// SliderScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f); //
|
|
// OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) IMGUI_API bool SliderScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, const void*
|
|
// p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f); // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June
|
|
// 2020) static inline bool DragFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f) { return
|
|
// DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); } // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) static inline bool
|
|
// DragFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f) { return DragScalarN(label,
|
|
// ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); } // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) static inline bool DragFloat3(const char* label,
|
|
// float v[3], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f) { return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, v_speed,
|
|
// &v_min, &v_max, format, power); } // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) static inline bool DragFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_speed, float
|
|
// v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f) { return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); }
|
|
// // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) static inline bool SliderFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power
|
|
// = 1.0f) { return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); } // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June
|
|
// 2020) static inline bool SliderFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f) { return
|
|
// SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); } // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) static inline bool
|
|
// SliderFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f) { return SliderScalarN(label,
|
|
// ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); } // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) static inline bool SliderFloat4(const char* label,
|
|
// float v[4], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f) { return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, &v_min,
|
|
// &v_max, format, power); } // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020)
|
|
//-- OBSOLETED in 1.77 and before
|
|
// static inline bool BeginPopupContextWindow(const char* str_id, ImGuiMouseButton mb, bool over_items) { return BeginPopupContextWindow(str_id, mb |
|
|
// (over_items ? 0 : ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverItems)); } // OBSOLETED in 1.77 (from June 2020) static inline void TreeAdvanceToLabelPos() {
|
|
// SetCursorPosX(GetCursorPosX() + GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()); } // OBSOLETED in 1.72 (from July 2019) static inline void SetNextTreeNodeOpen(bool open,
|
|
// ImGuiCond cond = 0) { SetNextItemOpen(open, cond); } // OBSOLETED in 1.71 (from June 2019) static inline float
|
|
// GetContentRegionAvailWidth() { return GetContentRegionAvail().x; } // OBSOLETED in 1.70 (from May 2019) static inline
|
|
// ImDrawList* GetOverlayDrawList() { return GetForegroundDrawList(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.69 (from Mar 2019) static
|
|
// inline void SetScrollHere(float ratio = 0.5f) { SetScrollHereY(ratio); } // OBSOLETED in 1.66 (from Nov 2018)
|
|
// static inline bool IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange() { return IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.63 (from Aug
|
|
// 2018)
|
|
//-- OBSOLETED in 1.60 and before
|
|
// static inline bool IsAnyWindowFocused() { return IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow); } // OBSOLETED in 1.60 (from Apr
|
|
// 2018) static inline bool IsAnyWindowHovered() { return IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow); } // OBSOLETED in 1.60
|
|
// (between Dec 2017 and Apr 2018) static inline void ShowTestWindow() { return ShowDemoWindow(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017
|
|
// and Dec 2017) static inline bool IsRootWindowFocused() { return IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow); } // OBSOLETED
|
|
// in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017) static inline bool IsRootWindowOrAnyChildFocused() { return
|
|
// IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootAndChildWindows); } // OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017) static inline void
|
|
// SetNextWindowContentWidth(float w) { SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(w, 0.0f)); } // OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec
|
|
// 2017) static inline float GetItemsLineHeightWithSpacing() { return GetFrameHeightWithSpacing(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.53
|
|
// (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017) IMGUI_API bool Begin(char* name, bool* p_open, ImVec2 size_first_use, float bg_alpha = -1.0f, ImGuiWindowFlags flags=0);
|
|
// // OBSOLETED in 1.52 (between Aug 2017 and Oct 2017): Equivalent of using SetNextWindowSize(size, ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver) and SetNextWindowBgAlpha(). static
|
|
// inline bool IsRootWindowOrAnyChildHovered() { return IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootAndChildWindows); } // OBSOLETED in 1.52 (between Aug 2017
|
|
// and Oct 2017) static inline void AlignFirstTextHeightToWidgets() { AlignTextToFramePadding(); } // OBSOLETED
|
|
// in 1.52 (between Aug 2017 and Oct 2017) static inline void SetNextWindowPosCenter(ImGuiCond c=0) { SetNextWindowPos(GetMainViewport()->GetCenter(), c,
|
|
// ImVec2(0.5f,0.5f)); } // OBSOLETED in 1.52 (between Aug 2017 and Oct 2017) static inline bool IsItemHoveredRect() { return
|
|
// IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RectOnly); } // OBSOLETED in 1.51 (between Jun 2017 and Aug 2017) static inline bool
|
|
// IsPosHoveringAnyWindow(const ImVec2&) { IM_ASSERT(0); return false; } // OBSOLETED in 1.51 (between Jun 2017 and Aug
|
|
// 2017): This was misleading and partly broken. You probably want to use the io.WantCaptureMouse flag instead. static inline bool IsMouseHoveringAnyWindow()
|
|
// { return IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow); } // OBSOLETED in 1.51 (between Jun 2017 and Aug 2017) static inline bool
|
|
// IsMouseHoveringWindow() { return IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem); }
|
|
// // OBSOLETED in 1.51 (between Jun 2017 and Aug 2017)
|
|
//-- OBSOLETED in 1.50 and before
|
|
// static inline bool CollapsingHeader(char* label, const char* str_id, bool framed = true, bool default_open = false) { return CollapsingHeader(label,
|
|
// (default_open ? (1 << 5) : 0)); } // OBSOLETED in 1.49 static inline ImFont*GetWindowFont() { return GetFont(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.48
|
|
// static inline float GetWindowFontSize() { return GetFontSize(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.48
|
|
// static inline void SetScrollPosHere() { SetScrollHere(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.42
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// OBSOLETED in 1.82 (from Mars 2021): flags for AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), AddImageRounded(), PathRect()
|
|
typedef ImDrawFlags ImDrawCornerFlags;
|
|
enum ImDrawCornerFlags_ {
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_None = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone, // Was == 0 prior to 1.82, this is now == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone which is != 0 and not implicit
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft =
|
|
ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft, // Was == 0x01 (1 << 0) prior to 1.82. Order matches ImDrawFlags_NoRoundCorner* flag (we exploit this internally).
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight, // Was == 0x02 (1 << 1) prior to 1.82.
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft, // Was == 0x04 (1 << 2) prior to 1.82.
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight, // Was == 0x08 (1 << 3) prior to 1.82.
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_All = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll, // Was == 0x0F prior to 1.82
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_Top = ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft | ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight,
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_Bot = ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft | ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight,
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_Left = ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft | ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft,
|
|
ImDrawCornerFlags_Right = ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight | ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight,
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
// RENAMED and MERGED both ImGuiKey_ModXXX and ImGuiModFlags_XXX into ImGuiMod_XXX (from September 2022)
|
|
// RENAMED ImGuiKeyModFlags -> ImGuiModFlags in 1.88 (from April 2022). Exceptionally commented out ahead of obscolescence schedule to reduce confusion and
|
|
// because they were not meant to be used in the first place.
|
|
typedef ImGuiKeyChord ImGuiModFlags; // == int. We generally use ImGuiKeyChord to mean "a ImGuiKey or-ed with any number of ImGuiMod_XXX value", but you may
|
|
// store only mods in there.
|
|
enum ImGuiModFlags_ {
|
|
ImGuiModFlags_None = 0,
|
|
ImGuiModFlags_Ctrl = ImGuiMod_Ctrl,
|
|
ImGuiModFlags_Shift = ImGuiMod_Shift,
|
|
ImGuiModFlags_Alt = ImGuiMod_Alt,
|
|
ImGuiModFlags_Super = ImGuiMod_Super
|
|
};
|
|
// typedef ImGuiKeyChord ImGuiKeyModFlags; // == int
|
|
// enum ImGuiKeyModFlags_ { ImGuiKeyModFlags_None = 0, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Ctrl = ImGuiMod_Ctrl, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Shift = ImGuiMod_Shift, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Alt =
|
|
// ImGuiMod_Alt, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Super = ImGuiMod_Super };
|
|
|
|
#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
|
|
|
|
// RENAMED IMGUI_DISABLE_METRICS_WINDOW > IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS in 1.88 (from June 2022)
|
|
#if defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_METRICS_WINDOW) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS)
|
|
#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS
|
|
#endif
|
|
#if defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_METRICS_WINDOW) && defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS)
|
|
#error IMGUI_DISABLE_METRICS_WINDOW was renamed to IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS, please use new name.
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
#if defined(__clang__)
|
|
#pragma clang diagnostic pop
|
|
#elif defined(__GNUC__)
|
|
#pragma GCC diagnostic pop
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
#ifdef _MSC_VER
|
|
#pragma warning(pop)
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// Include imgui_user.h at the end of imgui.h (convenient for user to only explicitly include vanilla imgui.h)
|
|
#ifdef IMGUI_INCLUDE_IMGUI_USER_H
|
|
#include "imgui_user.h"
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
|